TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
WARNING!
This manual has been prepared with the assistance of
service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with
the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle. It is
supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and
various customer oriented documents. You are urged to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod-
ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with
the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be
aware of all safety warnings.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the table of contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
When it comes to service, remember that your dealer
knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained techni-
cians and genuine Mopar parts, and is interested in
your satisfaction.
The detailed index, at the rear of this manual, contains a
complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this owner’s manual:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTRODUCTION
5
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This manual contains WARNINGS against operating
procedures which could result in an accident or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures
which could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do
not read this entire manual you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is located near
the left front corner of the windshield. The VIN is visible
from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears on the Automobile Information
Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle.
Save this label for a convenient record of your vehicle
identification number and optional equipment.
VIN LOCATION
NOTE: It is illegal to remove the VIN plate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
(BeltAlert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
You can insert the double sided keys into the locks with
either side up.
Ignition Key Removal
The shift lever must be in PARK. Turn the key to the
LOCK position, then remove the key.
2
Vehicle Key
Ignition Key Positions
The dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key
code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can
be used to order duplicate keys from your dealer. Ask
your dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe
place.
NOTE: The power window switches, radio, power
sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain
active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been
turned off. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature. The time is programmable through the electronic
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
vehicle information center (EVIC) — if equipped. Refer to
Personal Settings in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) Section for details.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
If you open the driver’s door and the key is in the ignition
switch, a chime will sound to remind you to remove the
key.
WARNING!
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds
when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC
positions.
Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is danger-
ous for a number of reasons. A child or others could
be injured. Children should be warned not to touch
the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector
lever. Don’t leave the keys in the ignition. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Horn
Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position to
operate the horn.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho-
rized operation of the vehicle by disabling the engine.
The system will shut the engine off after 2 seconds of
running if an invalid key is used to start the vehicle. This
system utilizes ignition keys which have an electronic
chip (transponder) embedded into them. Only keys that
have been programmed to the vehicle can be used to start
and operate the vehicle.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System does not need to be
armed or activated. Operation of the system is automatic
regardless of whether or not the vehicle is locked or
unlocked.
NOTE:
•
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible
with remote starting systems. Use of these systems
may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
2
During normal operation, the Vehicle Theft Alarm Indi-
cator Light will come on for three (3) seconds immedi-
ately after the ignition switch is turned on for a bulb
check. Afterwards, if the bulb remains on, this indicates a
problem with the electronics.
•
Exxon/ Mobil Speed Pass,™ additional Sentry Keys, or
any other transponder equipped components on the
same keychain will not cause a key-related (tran-
sponder) fault unless the additional part is physi-
cally held against the ignition key being used
when starting the vehicle. Cell phones, pagers, or
other RF electronics will not cause interference with
this system.
If the bulb begins to flash after the bulb check, this
indicates that an invalid key has been used to start the
vehicle. Both of these conditions will result in the engine
being shut off after two (2) seconds of running. Keep in
mind that a key which has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the
ignition lock cylinder for that vehicle.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
If the Vehicle Theft Alarm Indicator Light comes on
during normal vehicle operation (vehicle has been run-
ning for longer than 10 seconds), a fault has been
detected in the electronics and the vehicle should be
serviced as soon as possible.
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
be programmed to any other vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four digit PIN number. This number is required
for dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may
be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the
Customer Key Programming procedure. This procedure
consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key is one which has never been
programmed.
3. Insert the second valid key and turn the ignition
switch ON within 15 seconds. After ten seconds a chime
will sound and the Vehicle Theft Alarm Indicator Light
will begin to flash. Turn the ignition switch OFF and
remove the second key.
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch and
turn the ignition switch ON within 60 seconds. After 10
seconds a single chime will sound and the Vehicle Theft
Alarm Indicator Light will stop flashing, turn on again
for 3 seconds, and then turn off.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to the
dealer.
The new Sentry Key has been programmed. The Keyless
Entry Transmitter will also be programmed during this
procedure.
Customer Key Programming
You can program new sentry keys to the system if you
have two valid sentry keys by performing the following
procedure:
Repeat this procedure to program up to a total of 8 keys.
If you do not have a programmed sentry key, contact
your dealer for details.
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank(s) to
match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
NOTE: If a programmed key has been lost, see your
dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys-
tems memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting
your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be repro-
grammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to the dealer at
the time of service to be reprogrammed.
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch and
turn the ignition switch ON for at least 3 seconds but no
longer than 15 seconds. Turn the ignition switch OFF and
remove the first key.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
General Information
DOOR LOCKS
The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
Manual Door Locks
Lock the doors by pushing down on the door lock
plunger on each door trim panel.
2
•
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undes-
ired operation.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the keyless
entry transmitter or open the doors.
The lights will fade to off after about 30 seconds or they
will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is
turned ON from the LOCK position.
Door Lock Plunger
NOTE:
If the door lock plunger is down when you shut the door,
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the keys are not
inside the vehicle before closing the door.
•
None of the courtesy lights will operate if the dimmer
control is in the “defeat” position (extreme downward
position).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
•
For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle always remove the key
from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised
use of vehicle equipment may cause severe per-
sonal injuries and death.
Power Door Lock Switch
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
If you press the power door lock switch while the key is
in the ignition, and any front door is open, the power
locks will not operate. This prevents you from acciden-
tally locking your keys in the vehicle. Removing the key
or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. A
chime will sound if the key is in the LOCK or ACC
position and a door is open, as a reminder to remove the
key.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
Automatic Door Locks
The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power
door locks if all of the following conditions are met:
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, the Automatic
Door Locks can be enabled or disabled by performing the
following procedure:
2
1. The Auto Lock feature is enabled.
2. The transmission is in gear.
3. All doors are closed.
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and
back to LOCK 4 times ending up in the LOCK position.
4. The throttle is pressed.
5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/ h).
6. The doors were not previously locked using the power
door lock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter.
The Automatic Door Lock feature can be enabled or
disabled. Refer to “Personal Settings” (Customer Pro-
grammable Features) in the Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC) section of this manual for details.
Ignition Key Position
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Depress the power door lock switch to lock the doors.
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/ h).
3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
4. The driver door is opened.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/ h).
The Auto Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled.
Refer to “Personal Settings” (Customer Programmable
Features) in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) section of this manual.
Power Door Lock Switch
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, the Auto
Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled by performing
the following procedure:
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
Auto Unlock
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and
back to LOCK 4 times ending up in the LOCK position.
1. The Auto Unlock feature is enabled.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
Child Protection Door Lock
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a child
protection door lock system.
2
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged.
Ignition Key Position
3. Depress the power door unlock switch to unlock the
doors.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
NOTE: Use the Auto Door Locks and Auto Unlock
features in accordance with local laws.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To activate the system, open the rear door and move the
child lock control, located near the door’s rear latch, to
the ON position.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors, open
the trunk, or activate the panic alarm from distances up
to about 23 feet (7 meters) using a hand held radio
transmitter. The transmitter need not be pointed at the
vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: Inserting the key into the ignition switch dis-
ables all buttons on that transmitter however; the buttons
on the remaining transmitters will continue to work.
Shifting the vehicle out of PARK disables all transmitter
buttons for all keys.
Child Lock Control
When the child lock system is engaged the door can be
opened only by using the outside door handle even
though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Turn Head-
lights on with Remote Key Unlock” under “Personal
Settings” in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) section of this manual for details.
2
NOTE: The system can also be programmed to unlock
all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button. On
electronic vehicle information center (EVIC) equipped
vehicles, refer to “Remote Unlock Driver’s Door 1st”
under “Personal Settings” in the Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC) section of this manual. On non-
EVIC equipped vehicles, perform the following steps:
Keyless Entry Transmitter
To unlock the doors:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
key fob.
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the transmitter
once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice to unlock all
doors. The turn signal lights will flash twice to acknowl-
edge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system also
turns on.
2. Continue to hold the LOCK button at least 4 seconds,
but not longer than 10 seconds, then press and hold the
UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
The headlights will also activate and remain on for 90
seconds when the doors are unlocked with the remote
keyless entry transmitter. The time for this feature is
programmable on vehicles equipped with the Electronic
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle, by
pressing the LOCK/ UNLOCK button on the keyfob.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the keyfob while
you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
The “Sound Horn On Lock” feature can be reactivated by
repeating this procedure.
To unlatch the trunk:
Press the trunk button on the transmitter two times to
unlatch the trunk.
The “Remote Unlock Driver’s Door 1st” feature can be
reactivated by repeating this procedure.
Using The Panic Alarm:
To turn the panic alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
hold the PANIC button on the transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the panic alarm is on, the
headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse
on and off and the interior lights will turn on.
To lock the doors:
Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to
lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash once and
the horn will chirp once to acknowledge the signal. If
desired, the “Sound Horn On Lock” feature can be
turned on or off. On electronic vehicle information center
(EVIC) equipped vehicles, refer to “Personal Settings” in
the “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” sec-
tion of this manual. On non-EVIC equipped vehicles,
perform the following steps:
The panic alarm will stay on for 3 minutes unless you
turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or
if the vehicle speed is 15 mph (24 km/ h) or greater.
NOTE:
•
The interior lights will turn off when the ignition is
switched to the ACC or ON position after the panic
alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and
horn will remain on.
1. Press the LOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds.
2. While the LOCK button is pressed (after 4 seconds),
press the PANIC button. Release both buttons.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
•
When you turn off the panic alarm by pressing the
PANIC button a second time, you may have to be
closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises
of the system.
4. Test the flash lights with LOCK feature while outside
of the vehicle, by pressing the LOCK button on the key
fob with the ignition in the LOCK position, and the key
removed.
2
To Turn Off “Flash Lights On Lock/Unlock”
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the key fob, while
you are in the vehicle, will activate the Security Alarm.
Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will
cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to
deactivate the Security Alarm.
NOTE: The Flash Lights On Lock/ Unlock feature can
be turned on or off. On electronic vehicle information
center (EVIC) equipped vehicles, refer to ЉPersonal Set-
tingsЉ in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
section of this manual. On non-EVIC equipped vehicles,
perform the following steps:
The “Flash Lights On Lock/ Unlock” feature can be
reactivated by repeating this procedure.
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on the key fob.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
2. Continue to hold the UNLOCK button at least 4
seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds, then press and
hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK
button.
•
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If your Remote Keyless Entry transmitter fails to operate
from a normal distance, check for these two conditions.
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
the battery is a minimum of three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
Transmitter Battery Service
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE: Do not touch the battery terminals that are on
the back housing or the printed circuit board.
Separating Transmitter Halves
2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
1. With the transmitter buttons facing down, remove the
small screw, and separate the two halves of the transmit-
ter. Make sure not to damage the rubber gasket during
removal.
3. To reassemble the transmitter case, join the two halves
of the case together. Install and tighten the screw until
snug. Make sure there is an even “gap” between the two
halves. Test transmitter operation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
VEHICLE THEFT ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
it does not illuminate, the system is not arming. Also, if
you open a door during the arming period, the system
will cancel the arming process. If you wish to rearm the
system after closing the door, you must repeat one of the
previously described arming sequences.
The Vehicle Theft Alarm system monitors the vehicle
doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for
unauthorized operation. If something triggers the alarm,
the system will prevent the vehicle from starting and
provide the following audible and visual signals: the
horn will pulse; the headlights will flash; the park lights
will flash; and the Vehicle Theft Alarm Indicator light in
the instrument cluster will flash.
2
To disarm the system: either press the UNLOCK button
on the remote keyless entry transmitter or insert a valid
sentry key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key
to the ON/ START position. If something has triggered
the system in your absence, the horn will sound three
times when you disarm the system. Check the vehicle for
tampering.
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the system will turn off the horn after 3
minutes, turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes,
and then the system will rearm itself.
NOTE:
•
The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on
the keyless entry transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
system.
To arm the system: Remove the key from the ignition
switch and either:
1. Press a power door lock switch while the driver’s or
passenger’s door is open.
•
The system remains armed during trunk entry. Press-
ing the trunk button will not disarm the system. If
someone enters the vehicle through the trunk and
opens any door the alarm will sound.
2. Press the LOCK button on the keyless entry transmitter.
After the last door is closed, or if all doors are closed, the
system will arm itself in about 16 seconds. During that
time, the Vehicle Theft Alarm Indicator light will flash. If
•
When the system is armed, the doors can not be
unlocked from the interior power door lock switches.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Vehicle Theft Alarm system is designed to protect
your vehicle, however, you can create conditions where
the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the
previously described arming sequences has occurred, the
system will arm regardless of whether you are in the
vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
system.
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The window controls on the driver’s door control all the
door windows.
If the alarm system is armed and the battery becomes
disconnected the system will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected. The exterior lights will flash, the
horn will sound, and the ignition will not start the
vehicle. If this occurs, disarm the system.
Power Window Switches
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
The window controls will operate only when the ignition
switch is in the ON or ACCESSORY position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
The window lock switch on the driver’s door allows you
to disable the window controls on the passenger doors.
When the lock switch is pressed, the window controls on
the passenger doors will not illuminate and the passen-
ger windows will be disabled.
To open the window part way, press the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
2
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the auto-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches
will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch
is turned off. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the win-
dows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power window
switches will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned off. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature. The time is programmable
through the EVIC. Refer to “Delay Power Off to Acces-
sories Until Exit” under “Personal Settings (Customer
Programmable Features)” under “Electronic Vehicle In-
formation Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual for
details.
Auto Down Feature
The driver door power window switch, and some model
passenger door power window switches have an auto
down feature. Press the window switch to the second
detent, release, and the window will go down automati-
cally.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Auto Up Feature with Anti–Pinch Protection — If
Equipped
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and
Programmable Features)” under “Electronic Vehicle In-
formation Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual for
details.
the window will go up automatically.
NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during
auto-closure it will reverse direction and then stop.
Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to
close the window.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
auto-up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release when you want the window to
stop.
NOTE: Any impact due to rough road conditions may
trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during
auto closure. If this happens pull the switch lightly to the
first detent and hold to close window manually.
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches
will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch
is turned off. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power window
switches will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned off. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature. The time is programmable
through the EVIC. Refer to “Delay Power Off to Acces-
sories Until Exit” under “Personal Settings (Customer
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
Reset
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
Any time the vehicle battery is disconnected or goes dead
the auto-up function will be disabled. To reactivate the
auto-up feature perform the following steps after vehicle
power is restored:
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
2
The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by
pressing the Trunk Release Button located on the instru-
ment panel to the left of the steering wheel.
1. Pull the window switch up to close window com-
pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
NOTE: The transmission must be in Park before the
switch will operate.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue to
hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after
the window is fully open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
Trunk Release Button
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by
pressing the trunk button on the Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter two times.
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
WARNING!
With the ignition ON, the trunk open symbol will display
in the instrument cluster indicating that the trunk is
open. The odometer display will reappear once the trunk
is closed.
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
With the key in lock position or key out, the trunk open
symbol will be displayed until the trunk is closed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
Trunk Emergency Release
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front
and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, front
airbags for both the driver and front passenger and, if so
equipped, left and right side curtain airbags for the
driver and passengers seated next to a window. If you
will be carrying children too small for adult-size belts,
your seat belts also can be used to hold infant and child
restraint systems.
2
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Emergency Release
The trunk of your vehicle is equipped with an emergency
release handle. It is located on the inside of the trunk lid,
near the latch, and is coated so that it glows in a darkened
trunk. Pull on the handle to open the trunk.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
Lap/ Shoulder Belts.
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock
and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle
or being thrown out.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision which includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.
WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
WARNING!
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the front seat.
•
•
Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the
best. Wearing your belt in the wrong place could
make your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could even
slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instruc-
tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep
your passengers safe, too.
2
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch
plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt
go around your lap.
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for
more than one person, no matter what their size.
Latch Plate To Buckle
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a
collision.
WARNING!
•
A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not
protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too
high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries.
Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
•
A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well. In
a sudden stop you could move too far forward, increas-
ing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is very
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside sur-
faces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head
and neck injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your
strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
Removing Slack From Belt
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
WARNING!
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as pos-
sible and keep it snug.
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
2
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.
If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it
to your dealer and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
you’ll prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
In the driver and front passenger seats, the shoulder belt
can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt
away from your neck. Push and fully depress the button
above the webbing to release the anchorage, and then
move it up or down to the position that serves you best.
In the rear seat, move toward the center of the seat to
position the belt away from your neck.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove any slack from the seat belts in the event of a
collision. These devices improve the performance of the
seat belt system by assuring that the belt is tight about the
occupant in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size
occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still
must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC) (refer to information on Airbags
in this section). Like the front airbags, the pretensioners
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
are single use items. After a collision that is severe
enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners, both
must be replaced.
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON
or START position. DaimlerChrysler does not recom-
mend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert).
2
Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System (BeltAlert)
If the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt has not been
buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if
the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/ h), the
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will alert the
driver or front passenger to buckle their seat belt. The
driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle
their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, the
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will continue to
chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96
seconds or until the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt
is buckled. The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert)
will be reactivated if the driver’s or front passenger’s seat
belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the
vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/ h).
1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and
buckle the driver’s seat belt.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait
for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn off.
3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the
ON position, unbuckle and then re-buckle the driver’s
seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds, ending
with the seat belt buckled.
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn on
while unbuckling and off while re-buckling the seat belt.
It may be necessary to retract the seat belt.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. A
single chime will sound to signify that you have success-
fully completed the programming.
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be en-
abled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by
following these steps:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be reacti-
vated by repeating this procedure.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if so
equipped) is in its lowest position, your dealer can
provide you with a seat belt extender. This extender
should be used only if the existing belt is not long
enough. When it is not required, remove the extender
and store it.
NOTE: Although the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert) has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Warning
Light will continue to illuminate while the driver’s or
front passenger’s seat belt remains unbuckled.
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is
worn low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
Driver and Right Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag
NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal
regulations that allow less forceful deployment.
The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This
may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation
that are based on collision severity and occupant size.
Also, the front passenger airbag is certified to the Federal
regulations that define Occupant Classification (refer to
information on Occupant Classification System in this
section).
2
Front Airbag Components
This vehicle has front airbags for both the driver and
front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s airbag is mounted in the center of
the steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag is
mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove com-
partment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the
airbag covers.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle may also be equipped with left and right
side curtain airbags to protect the driver and passengers
sitting next to a window. If the vehicle is equipped with
side curtain airbags, they are located above the side
windows. Their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG.
WARNING!
• Do not put anything on or around the front airbag
covers or attempt to manually open them. You may
damage the airbags and you could be injured be-
cause the airbags are no longer functional. These
protective covers for the airbag cushions are de-
signed to open only when the airbags are inflating.
• If your vehicle is equipped with left and right side
curtain airbags, do not stack luggage or other cargo
up high enough to block the location of the side
curtain airbag. The area where the side curtain airbag
is located should remain free from any obstructions.
• If your vehicle is equipped with left and right side
curtain airbags, do not have any accessory items
installed which will alter the roof, including adding
a sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
Window Airbag
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the
interior trim, but they will open to allow airbag deploy-
ment.
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizens band radios etc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
Along with the seat belts, front airbags work with the
instrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved
protection for the driver and front passenger. Side Cur-
tain Airbags also work with seat belts to improve occu-
pant protection.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize
the risk of harm from a deploying airbag.
1. Children 12 years old and under should ride buckled
up in the rear seat. Infants in rear-facing child restraints
should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a
passenger front airbag. An airbag deployment could
cause severe injury or death to infants in that position.
2
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to
severe frontal collisions.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (refer to information on Child Restraint in
this section) should be secured in the rear seat in child
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats.
NOTE: The passenger front airbag may not deploy
even when the driver front airbag has if the Occupant
Classification System (refer to information on Occupant
Classification System in this section) has determined the
passenger seat is empty or is occupied by someone that is
classified in the Љsmall childЉ category.
Older children who do not use child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the
shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.
If your vehicle is so equipped, the Side Curtain Airbag on
the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to
severe side collisions. But even in collisions where the
airbags work, you need the seat belts to keep you in the
right position for the airbags to protect you properly.
If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front
passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the
seat as far back as possible, and use the proper child
restraint (refer to information on Child Restraint in this
section).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
WARNING!
•
Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you
have airbags.
3. All occupants should use their seat belts properly.
4. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the airbags time to inflate.
5. If your vehicle has left and right side curtain airbags,
do not lean against the door, airbags will inflate forcefully
into the space between you and the door.
•
•
Being too close to the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel during airbag deployment could cause
serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit
back, comfortably extending your arms to reach
the steering wheel or instrument panel.
6. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the
Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided in the ЉIf
You Need Customer AssistanceЉ section in this manual.
If the vehicle has left and right side curtain
airbags, they also need room to inflate. Do not
lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
Air Bag System Components
The airbag system consists of the following:
−
−
−
Occupant Classification Module
Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light
Weight Sensors
•
•
•
•
•
Occupant Restraint Controller
Airbag Warning Light
Driver Airbag
2
How The Airbag System Works
•
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the
airbags to inflate. The front airbag inflators are de-
signed to provide different rates of airbag inflation
from direction provided by the ORC. The ORC may
also modify the rate of inflation based on the occupant
size provided by the Occupant Classification Module.
The ORC will not detect roll over.
Passenger Airbag
Side Curtain Airbags above Side Windows (if
equipped)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Side Remote Acceleration Sensors (if equipped)
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
•
The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in
the START or ON positions. These include all of the
items listed above except the knee bolster, the instru-
ment panel, and the steering wheel and column. If the
key is in the LOCK position, in the ACC position, or
not in the ignition, the airbags are not on and will not
inflate.
Interconnecting Wiring
Knee Impact Bolsters
Front Acceleration Sensors
Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners
Occupant Classification System (OCS) for the Front
Passenger Seat
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Also, the ORC turns on the airbag warning
light and PAD indicator light in the instru-
ment panel for 6 to 8 seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
•
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part of
a Federally regulated safety system required for this
vehicle. It is designed to turn off the front passenger
airbag in the unlikely event that a rear-facing infant
seat is in the front passenger seat.
self-check, the airbag warning light will turn off. The
PAD indicator light will function normally (refer to
information on Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indi-
cator Light in this section). If the ORC detects a
malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the
airbag warning light either momentarily or continu-
ously. A single chime will sound if the light comes on
again after initial start up.
NOTE: Children 12 years and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint.
•
The Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light
(an amber light located in the center of the instrument
panel) tells the driver and front passenger when the
front passenger air bag is turned off. The PAD indica-
tor light illuminates the front passenger air bag icon
and the words ЉPASS AIR BAG OFFЉ to show that the
passenger air bag will not inflate during a collision
requiring air bags. When the right front passenger seat
is empty or when very light objects are placed on the
seat, the passenger air bag will not inflate even though
the PAD indicator light is not illuminated.
WARNING!
Ignoring the AIRBAG light in your instrument panel
could mean you won’t have the airbags to protect
you in a collision. If the light does not come on, stays
on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you
drive, have the airbag system checked right away.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
and will not inflate. If the PAD indicator light is not
illuminated, DO NOT assume the air bag is turned off
and move the child restraint to the rear seat. A
deploying passenger air bag can cause death or seri-
ous injury to a child in a rear facing infant seat.
2
NOTE: Even though this vehicle is equipped with an
occupant classification system, children 12 years and
under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an
appropriate child restraint (refer to information on Child
Restraint in this section).
Passenger Airbag
Disable (PAD)
Indicator Light
Front Passenger Seat
Occupant
Airbag
Status
Passenger Airbag Disable Light
The PAD indicator light should not be illuminated
when teenagers, most children in a forward-facing
child restraint or booster seats, most children that can
properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt, and when an
adult passenger is properly seated in the front passen-
ger seat. In this case, the air bag is ready to be inflated
if a collision requiring an air bag occurs.
Adult
OFF
ON
Grocery Bags, Heavy
Briefcases and Other
Relatively Light
Objects
ON
OFF
Empty or Very Small
Objects
OFF*
OFF
For almost all properly installed rear facing child
restraints, the PAD indicator light will be illuminated
indicating that the front passenger air bag is turned off
* Since the system senses weight, some small objects
will turn the PAD Indicator Light on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The OCS classifies an occupant using weight sensors
mounted in the base of the front passenger seat. Any
weight on the seat will be sensed by the system. Objects
hanging on the seat or other passengers pushing down
on the seat will also be sensed. The weight of an adult
will cause the system to turn the airbag on. In this case,
the OCS has classified the occupant of the seat as an
adult. An adult occupant needs to sit in a normal position
(with their feet on or near the floor) in order to be
properly classified. Reclining the seat back too far may
change how an occupant is classified by the OCS.
this can also affect occupant classification. Also, if you
fold down the rear seat check to be sure it doesn’t touch
the front passenger seat.
If the front passenger seat is damaged in any way, it
should only be serviced by an authorized dealer. If the
seat is removed (or even if the seat attachment bolts are
loosened or tightened in any way), take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer.
If there is a fault present in the OCS, the Airbag Warning
Light (a red light located in the center of the instrument
cluster directly in front of the driver) will be turned on.
This indicates that you should take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. The Airbag Warning Light is turned on
whenever there is fault that can affect the operation of the
airbag system. If there is a fault present in the OCS, both
the PAD Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light
are illuminated to show that the passenger airbag is
turned off until the fault is cleared. If an object is lodged
under the seat and interferes with operation of the weight
sensors, a fault will occur which turns on both the PAD
Drivers and adult passengers should verify that the PAD
Indicator Light is not illuminated when an adult is riding
in the front passenger seat. If an adult occupant’s weight
is transferred to another part of the vehicle (like the door
or instrument panel), the weight sensors in the seat may
not properly classify the occupant. Objects lodged under
the seat or between the seat and the center console can
prevent the occupant’s weight from being measured
properly and may result in the occupant being improp-
erly classified. Ensure that the front passenger seat back
does not touch anything placed on the back seat because
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light. Once the
lodged object is removed, the fault will be automatically
cleared after a short period of time.
•
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is lo-
cated beneath the front passenger seat. The OCM
classifies the occupant into categories based on the
measurements made by the seat weight sensors. The
OCM communicates with the Occupant Restraint Con-
troller (ORC). The ORC uses the occupant category to
determine whether the front passenger airbag should
be turned off. It also determines the rate of airbag
inflation during a collision.
2
•
The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a
collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator
units. A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to
inflate the front airbags. Different airbag inflation rates
may be possible based on collision severity and occu-
pant size. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper right side of the instrument panel separate and
fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size.
The bags fully inflate in about 50 - 70 milliseconds.
This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes.
The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger. The driver’s front
airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of
the airbag. The passenger’s front airbag gas is vented
through vent holes in the sides of the airbag. In this
way the airbags do not interfere with your control of
the vehicle.
•
•
Your vehicle has four Weight Sensors located between
the seat and the floor pan. The weight sensors measure
applied weight and transfers that information to the
OCM.
The Side Impact SRS Side Curtain Airbag are de-
signed to activate only in certain side collisions. When
the ORC (with side impact option) detects a collision
requiring the side curtain airbag to inflate, it signals
the inflators on the crash side of the vehicle. A quantity
of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain
airbag. The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the
outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
covers the window. The airbag inflates in about 30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
milliseconds (about one quarter of the time it takes to
blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you
are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag
inflates. This especially applies to children. The side
curtain airbag is only about 3-1/ 2 inches (9 cm) thick
when it is inflated.
The following requirements must be strictly adhered to:
•
•
•
Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
Do not modify the front seat center console or center
position seat in any way.
Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not
designated for the specific model being repaired. Al-
ways use the correct seat cover specified for the
vehicle.
•
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of
the driver and the front passenger, and position every-
one for the best interaction with the front airbag.
The front passenger seat assembly contains critical com-
ponents that affect the front passenger airbag deploy-
ment. Correctly functioning front passenger seat compo-
nents are critical for the Occupant Classification System
(OCS) to properly classify the front passenger and calcu-
late the proper airbag deployment. Do not make any
modifications to the front passenger seat components,
assembly, or to the seat cover.
•
•
•
Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat
cover.
Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those
approved by DaimlerChrysler/ Mopar.
At no time should any supplemental restraint system
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fas-
tener be modified or replaced with any part except
those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler/
Mopar.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the front passenger seat assembly, its related compo-
nents, or seat cover may inadvertently change the
airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash. This
could result in death or serious injury to the front
seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an acci-
dent. A modified vehicle may not comply with
required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(FMVSS).
•
The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-
sions and/ or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
2
If A Deployment Occurs
•
As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for cleaning.
The airbag system is designed to deploy when the
Occupant Restraint Controller detects a moderate-to-
severe collision, to help restrain the driver and front
passenger, and then to immediately deflate.
NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to
need airbag protection will not activate the system. This
does not mean something is wrong with the airbag
system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
airbags have been deployed. If you are involved in
another collision, the airbags will not be in place to
protect you.
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the airbag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be
injured because the airbags are not there to protect
you. Do not modify the components or wiring,
including adding any kind of badges or stickers to
the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right
side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front
bumper, vehicle body structure, or frame.
WARNING!
Deployed airbags can’t protect you in another colli-
sion. Have the airbags replaced by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
• You need proper knee impact protection in a colli-
sion. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket equip-
ment on or behind the knee impact bolster.
Enhanced Accident Response Feature
If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical
system remains functional, vehicles equipped with
power door locks will unlock automatically. In addition,
approximately 5 seconds after the vehicle has stopped
moving, the interior lights will illuminate to aid visibility.
• Do not place or hang any items such as add-on video
players on the right front passenger seat back. The
additional weight may cause the Occupant Classifi-
cation System to be unable to correctly classify the
right front occupant. This could allow the passenger
frontal airbag to inflate when it is not desired.
NOTE: The interior lights can only be deactivated if the
key is removed from the ignition switch or the vehicle is
driven.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
your vehicle that it has airbags.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
Airbag Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to
inflate for your protection in an impact. While
the airbag system is designed to be mainte-
nance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the system promptly:
the electronic data may be used by DaimlerChrysler and
others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes
and associated injuries in order to assess and improve
vehicle performance. In addition to crash investigations
initiated by DaimlerChrysler, such investigations may be
requested by customers, insurance carriers, government
officials, and professional crash researchers, such as those
associated with universities, and with hospital and insur-
ance organizations.
2
•
The airbag light does not come on or flickers during
the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is first
turned on.
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
DaimlerChrysler (regardless of initiative), the company
or its designated representative will first obtain permis-
sion of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle
(usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before accessing the
electronic data stored, unless ordered to download data
by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e., pursuant to a
warrant). A copy of the data will be provided to the
custodial entity upon request. General data that does not
identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for
incorporation in aggregate crash databases, such as those
maintained by the US government and various states.
Data of a potentially sensitive nature, such as would
identify a particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be
•
•
The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second
interval.
The light flickers or comes on and remains on while
driving.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of an airbag deployment, your vehicle is
designed to record up to 2-seconds of specific vehicle
data parameters (see list below) in an event data recorder
prior to the moment of airbag deployment. Please note
that such data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys,
and are otherwise unavailable. In conjunction with other
data gathered during a complete accident investigation,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
treated confidentially. Confidential data will not be dis-
closed by DaimlerChrysler to any third party except
when:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Seatbelt status
Brake status (service and parking brakes)
Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
Engine control status (including engine speed)
Cruise control status
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved
Traction/ stability control status
2. Used in defense of litigation involving
DaimlerChrysler product
a
Child Restraint
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time, babies and children, too. Every state in the United
States and all Canadian provinces require that small
children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law,
and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant
4. Otherwise required by law
Data Parameters that May Be Recorded:
•
Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning light status for
electronically-controlled safety systems, including the
airbag system
Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck-
led up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
•
•
Airbag disable light status (if equipped)
ЉTimeЉ of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition
cycles and vehicle mileage)
•
Airbag deployment level (if applicable)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
carriers and “convertible” child seats.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny
baby, can become a missile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your lap
could become so great that you could not hold the
child, no matter how strong you are. The child and
others could be badly injured. Any child riding in
your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the
child’s size.
2
•
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). “Convertible” child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old. Both types of child restraints are
held in the vehicle by the lap/ shoulder belt or the
LATCH child restraint anchorage system. Refer to
“LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren)” in this section.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the right seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child:
•
Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger
airbag unless the airbag is turned off. An airbag
deployment could cause severe injury or death to
infants in this position.
Infants and Child Restraints
•
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
•
The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
WARNING!
•
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
•
•
Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
A rearward facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward facing child re-
straint in the front seat may be struck by a
deploying passenger airbag which may cause se-
vere or fatal injury to the infant.
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs
and cause serious personal injury.
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK.
•
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
where you will use it before you buy it.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
Older Children and Child Restraints
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seat back, should use the lap/ shoulder belt in a rear seat.
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are
older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older
than one year. These child seats are also held in the
vehicle by the lap/ shoulder belt or the LATCH child
restraint anchorage system. Refer to “LATCH — Child
Seat Anchorage System (Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren)” in this section.
•
•
Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
2
The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
•
•
Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing
more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit
the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit
with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the
child’s back is against the seat back, they should use a
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-
positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
lap/ shoulder belt.
LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
Anchors and Tether for CH ildren)
Your vehicle’s rear seat is equipped with the child
restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH
system provides for the installation of the child restraint
without using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing
the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper
tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle
structure.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now avail-
able. However, because the lower anchorages are to be
introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems
having attachments for those anchorages will continue to
also have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail-
able for some time. For some older child restraints, many
child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap
kits or retro-fit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all
the available attachments provided with your child re-
straint in any vehicle.
LATCH Anchorages
All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages
that are capable of accommodating LATCH-compatible
child seats. You should NEVER install LATCH-
compatible child seats such that two seats share a com-
mon lower anchorage.
Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
were provided with the child restraint system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars,
located at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seat back. The location of the lower
anchorages are identified by a symbol on the
seat back. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion
surfaces.
hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next
attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the
seat cover material. Then rotate the tether anchorage
cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the
child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchor-
age, being careful to route the tether strap to provide the
most direct path between the anchor and the child
restraint. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear
head restraints, raise the head restraint and, where pos-
sible, route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and route the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint. Finally, tighten all three straps
as you push the child restraint rearward and downward
into the seat, removing slack in the straps according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
2
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position located in the
panel between the rear seat back and the rear
window. These tether strap anchorages are
under a plastic cover with this symbol on it.
Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forward-
facing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should
stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are
not toys and should not be played with, and never leave
your child unattended in the vehicle.
plate will keep the belt tight, however, any seat belt
system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasion-
ally and pull it tight if necessary.
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/ shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening
on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the
buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt several times
to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the
release button facing out.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if by pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may need
to do something more. Disconnect the latch plate from
the buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latch
plate into the buckle again. If you still can’t make the
child restraint secure, try a different seating position.
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
belt
To attach a child restraint tether strap:
The passenger seat belts are equipped with cinching latch
plates which are designed to keep the lap portion tight
around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use
a locking clip. Pulling up on the shoulder portion of the
lap/ shoulder belt will tighten the belt. The cinching latch
1. Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the
seat where you are placing the child restraint.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
3. Attach the tether strap hook (A) of the child restraint to
the anchor (B) and remove slack in the tether strap
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-
tions.
2
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Tether Strap Mounting
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint and, where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine in
your new vehicle.
SAFETY TIPS
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55
mph (80 or 90 km/ h) are desirable.
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
follow the safety tips below.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be
detrimental and should be avoided.
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high
quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur. The recom-
mended viscosity and quality grades are shown in Section
7 of this manual. NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MIN-
ERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
WARNING!
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered as a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
If you are required to drive with the trunk open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Tires
2
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect tread and sidewall for cuts or
cracks. Check wheel nuts for tightness, and tires (includ-
ing spare) for proper pressure.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn
webbing, etc. If there is any question regarding belt or
retractor condition, replace the belt.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Airbag Light
The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the LED is not lit during starting, have it
checked. If the light stays on or comes on while driving,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or fuel, power steering fluid or brake
fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and
corrected immediately.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
64 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 65
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 67
MIRRORS
Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror — If Equipped
If the switch is in the “AUTO” position the mirror will
automatically adjust for annoying headlight glare from
vehicles behind you. The mirror will normally be in the
“AUTO” mode unless “OFF” is pressed on the switch at
the base of the mirror. A green light in the base of the
mirror will illuminate to indicate when this feature is on.
Inside Day/Night Mirror
Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear
window. A two point pivot system allows for horizontal
and vertical adjustment of the mirror.
3
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the
small control under the mirror to the night position
(toward rear of vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (toward windshield).
Automatic Dimming Mirror
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
68 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
electronic vehicle information center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — Per-
sonal Settings” for details.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the
mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and
wipe the mirror clean.
Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped
Some models have exterior mirrors that are hinged and
may move either forward or rearward to resist damage.
The hinges have three detent positions; full forward, full
rearward, and normal.
Driver’s Side Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer — If
Equipped
The driver’s side outside mirror automatically adjusts for
annoying headlight glare from vehicles behind you. This
feature can be turned on or off by pressing the button at
the base of the Inside Rearview Mirror.
Outside Mirror — Driver’s Side
Adjust the outside mirror to center on the adjacent lane of
traffic, with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the
inside mirror.
Outside Mirror — Passenger’s Side
Tilt in Reverse Feature — If Equipped
Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the
side of your vehicle in the portion of the mirror closest to
the vehicle. This type of mirror will give a much wider
view to the rear, and especially of the lane next to your
vehicle.
The ЉTilt in ReverseЉ feature tilts the outside rearview
mirrors down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE
with the ignition switch in the ON position. This feature
provides the customer with a better view of the ground
and vehicle in the area of the rear tires when backing up.
The mirrors move back to their previous position when
the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This feature is
disabled from the factory, but can be enabled by the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 69
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the right side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your right
side mirror could cause you to collide with another
vehicle or other object.
3
Use your inside mirror when judging the size or
distance of a vehicle seen in this convex mirror.
Power Remote-Control Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel next to the power door lock switch. A rotary
knob selects the left mirror, right mirror, or off position.
Power Mirror Controls
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory
Seat, you can use your remote keyless entry transmitter
or the memory switch on the driver’s door panel to
return the power mirrors to pre-programmed positions.
Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in this section for details.
After selecting a mirror move the knob in the same
direction you want the mirror to move. Use the center off
position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror
position.
Heated Remote Control Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature
is activated whenever you turn on the Rear Window
Defrost.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
70 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™) —
IF EQUIPPED
An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the
mirror cover upward. The light turns on automatically.
Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.
UConnect™ is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- vehicle
communications system. UConnect™ allows you to dial
a phone number with your cellular phone using simple
voice commands (e.g., ЉCall” ѧ “Mike” ѧ”WorkЉ or ЉDial”
ѧ “248-555-1212Љ). Your cellular phone’s audio is trans-
mitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
will automatically mute your radio when using the
UConnect™ system.
NOTE: The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular
phone equipped with the Bluetooth ЉHands-Free Profile,Љ
version 0.96 or higher. See www.chrysler.com/ uconnect
for supported phones.
UConnect™ allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle, and enables you to mute the system’s micro-
phone for private conversation.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 71
The UConnect™ phonebook enables you to store up to 32
names and four numbers per name. Each language has a
separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that
language. This system is driven through your Blue-
tooth™ Hands-Free profile cellular phone. UConnect™
features Bluetooth™ technology - the global standard
that enables different electronic devices to connect to
each other without wires or a docking station, so UCon-
nect works no matter where you stow your cellular
phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as
your phone is turned on and has been paired to the
vehicle’s UConnect™ system. The UConnect™ system
allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system.
Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used
with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages (as equipped).
3
UConnect™ Switches
The UConnect™ system can be used with any Hands-
Free Profile certified Bluetooth™ cellular phone. See
www.chrysler.com/ uconnect for supported phones. If
your cellular phone supports a different profile (e.g.,
Headset Profile), you may not be able to use any UCon-
nect™ features. Refer to your cellular service provider or
the phone manufacturer for details.
The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the
system and the control buttons that will enable you to
access the system.
The UConnect™ system is fully integrated with the
vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the UConnect™
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
72 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
system can either be adjusted from the radio volume
control knob, or from the steering wheel radio control
(right switch), if so equipped.
•
For each feature explanation in this section, only the
combined form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command, when you are asked for it. For
example, you can either use the combined form voice
command ЉPhonebook New Entry,Љ or you can break
the combined form command into two voice com-
mands: ЉPhonebookЉ and ЉNew Entry.Љ Please remem-
ber, the UConnect™ system works best when you talk
in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to some
one sitting eight feet away from you.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the UConnect™ system such as ЉCELLЉ or caller ID on
certain radios.
Operations
Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect™
system and to navigate through the UConnect™ menu
structure. Voice commands are required after most
UConnect™ system prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” at the end of this section.
Help Command
•
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the voice on beep, which follows the ЉReadyЉ prompt
or another prompt.
If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to
know what your options are at any prompt, say ЉHelpЉ
following the voice on beep. The UConnect™ system will
play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help.
•
For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying ЉSetupЉ and then
ЉPhone Pairing,Љ the following compound command
can be said: ЉSetup Phone Pairing.Љ
To activate the UConnect™ system from idle, simply
press the ’Phone’ button and follow audible prompts for
directions. All UConnect™ system sessions begin with a
press of the ’Phone’ button on the mirror.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 73
Cancel Command
•
www.jeep.com/ uconnect
At any prompt, after the voice on beep, you can say
ЉCancelЉ and you will be returned to the main menu.
However, in a few instances the system will take you
back to the previous menu.
The following are general phone to UConnect™ System
pairing instructions:
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
3
Pair (Link) UConnect™ System to a Cellular Phone
To begin using your UConnect™ system, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth™ enabled cellular phone.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉSetup Phone Pairing.Љ
•
•
When prompted, after the voice on beep, say ЉPair a
Phone.Љ
NOTE: The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular
phone equipped with the Bluetooth ЉHands-Free Profile,Љ
version 0.96 or higher. See www.chrysler.com/ uconnect
for supported phones.
You will be asked to say a four-digit pin number which
you will later need to enter into your cellular. You can
enter any four-digit pin number. You will not need to
remember this pin number after the initial pairing
process.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
ence your cellular phone owner’s manual. One of the
following vehicle specific websites may also provide
detailed instructions for pairing with the brand of phone
that you have:
•
The UConnect™ system will then prompt you to begin
the cellular phone pairing process on your cellular
phone. Before attempting to pair phone, please see
your cellular phone’s user manual (Bluetooth section)
for instructions on how to complete this step.
NOTE:
•
•
www.chrysler.com/ uconnect
www.dodge.com/ uconnect
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
74 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the UConnect™ system a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
•
•
•
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉDial.Љ
System will prompt you to say the number you want
call.
•
You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between 1 and 7, 1 being the highest
priority. You can pair up to seven cellular phones to
your UConnect™ system. However, at any given time,
only one cellular phone can be in use, connected to
your UConnect™ System. The priority allows the
UConnect™ system to know which cellular phone to
use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the
same time. For example, if priority 3 and priority 5
phones are present in the vehicle, the UConnect™
system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you
make a call. You can select to use a lower priority
cellular phone at any time (refer to ЉAdvanced Phone
ConnectivityЉ).
For example, you can say Љ234-567-8901.Љ The phone
number that you enter must be of valid length and
combination. The UConnect™ limits the user from
dialing invalid combination of numbers. For example,
234-567-890 is nine digits long, which is not a valid
phone number - the closest valid phone number has
ten digits.
•
The UConnect™ system will confirm the phone num-
ber and then dial. The number will appear in the
display of certain radios.
Call by Saying a Name
•
•
Press the “Phone” button to begin.
Dial by Saying a Number
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉCall.Љ
•
•
System will prompt you to say the name of the person
you want call.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 75
•
•
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say ЉJohn Doe,Љ where John Doe is a previ-
ously stored name entry in the UConnect™ phone-
book. Refer to ЉAdd Names to Your UConnect™
Phonebook,Љ to learn how to store a name in the
phonebook.
•
•
When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.:
ЉHome,Љ ЉWork,Љ ЉMobile,Љ or ЉPagerЉ). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
entry, if desired.
When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
3
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
The UConnect™ system will confirm the name and
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
may appear in the display of certain radios.
Add Names to Your UConnect™ Phonebook
The UConnect™ system will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible
only in that language.
NOTE: Adding names to phonebook is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
•
•
Press the “Phone” button to begin.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉPhonebook New Entry.Љ
Edit Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
•
When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the voice recognition and is recom-
mended. For example, say ЉRobert SmithЉ or ЉRobertЉ
instead of ЉBob.Љ
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
•
•
•
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉPhonebook Edit.Љ
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉPhonebook Delete.Љ
You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
•
After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say ЉList
NamesЉ to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the ЉVoice RecognitionЉ button
while the UConnect™ system is playing the desired
entry and say ЉDelete.Љ
Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit.
When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry
in the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or
return to the main menu.
•
•
After you enter the name, the UConnect™ system will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
work, mobile or pager. Say the designation you wish
to delete.
ЉPhonebook EditЉ can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add John Doe’s
work number later using the ЉPhonebook EditЉ feature.
Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
Delete Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be de-
leted. Note that only the phonebook in the current
language is deleted.
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77
Delete All Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
•
•
The UConnect™ system will then prompt you as to
number designation you wish to call.
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
The selected number will be dialed.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉPhonebook Erase All.Љ
Phone Call Features
3
The following features can be accessed through the
UConnect™ system if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the UConnect™ system. Check with
your cellular service provider for the features that you
have.
•
•
The UConnect™ system will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
List All Names in the UConnect™ Phonebook
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉPhonebook List Names.Љ
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
UConnect™ system will interrupt the vehicle audio
system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call. To reject the call, press and hold the ’Phone’ button
until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming
call was rejected.
•
•
The UConnect™ system will play the names of all the
phonebook entries.
To call one of the names in the list, press the ЉVoice
Recognition’ button during the playing of the desired
name and say ЉCall.Љ NOTE: the user can also exercise
ЉEditЉ or ЉDeleteЉ operations at this point.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Place/Retrieve a Call from Hold
Currently in Progress
To put a call on hold, press the ЈPhone’ button until you
hear a single beep which will indicate that the call has
been placed on hold. To bring the call back from hold,
press and hold the ЈPhone’ button until you hear a single
beep.
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell
phone. Press the ’Phone’ button to place the current call
on hold and answer the incoming call. NOTE: The
UConnect™ system compatible phones in market today
do not support rejecting an incoming call when another
call is in progress. Therefore, the user can only either
answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the ’Phone’ button until you hear a single beep
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at one
time.
Making a Second Call while Current Call in
Progress
Conference Call
To make a second call while you are currently in a call,
press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say ЉDialЉ or
ЉCallЉ followed by the phone number or phonebook entry
you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the
second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer
to ЉToggling Between Calls.Љ To combine two calls, refer
to ЉConference Call.Љ
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you hear a
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the ’Voice Recogni-
tion’ button while a call is in progress and make a second
phone call as described under ЉMaking a Second Call
while Current Call in Progress.Љ After the second call has
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79
established, press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you
hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have
been joined into one conference call.
•
After ignition key is switched off, a call can continue
on the UConnect™ system either until the call ends or
until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of
the call on the UConnect™ system and transfer of the
call to the mobile phone.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the ЈPhone’
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
3
•
•
After ignition key is switched to off, a call can continue
on the UConnect™ system for certain duration, after
which the call is automatically transferred from the
UConnect™ system to the mobile phone.
Redial
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
An active call is automatically transferred to the
mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉRedial.Љ
UConnect™ System Features
•
The UConnect™ system will call the last number that
was dialed on your cellular phone. Note: this may not
be the last number dialed from the UConnect™ sys-
tem.
Language Selection
To change the language that the UConnect™ system is
using,
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is progression of a phone call on
UConnect™ system after the vehicle ignition key has
been switched to off. Call continuation functionality
available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
(English, Espanol, or Francais, if so equipped).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
language selection.
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num-
ber. This feature is only supported in the USA.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: The emergency number dialed is based on the
Country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for USA and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not
be applicable with the available cellular service and area.
NOTE: After every UConnect™ language change op-
eration, only the language specific 32 name phonebook is
usable. The paired phone name is not language specific
and usable across all languages.
The UConnect™ system does slightly lower your
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
for the cell phone directly.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the
UConnect™ system to allow use of this vehicle feature
in emergency situations when the cell phone has
network coverage and stays paired to the UConnect™
system.
•
Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect™ system
is operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance,
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉTowing Assistance.Љ
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉEmergencyЉ and the UConnect™ system will instruct
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81
NOTE: The Towing Assistance number dialed is based
on the Country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-
528-2069 for USA, 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454
for Mexico city and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico
city in Mexico).
You can use your UConnect™ system to access a voice-
mail system or an automated service, such as, paging
service or automated customer service. Some services
require immediate response selection, in some instances,
that may be too quick for use of UConnect™ system.
3
Please refer to the 24-Hour “Towing Assistance” cover-
age details in the Warranty information booklet and on
the 24–Hour Towing Assistance Card.
When calling a number with your UConnect™ system
that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone
sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can push
the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say the sequence you
wish to enter followed by the word ЉSend.Љ For example,
if required to enter your pin number followed with a
pound 3 7 4 6 #, you can press the ’Voice Recognition’
button and say Љ3 7 4 6 # Send.Љ Saying a number, or
sequence of numbers, followed by ЉSendЉ is also to be
used to navigate through an automated customer service
center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager.
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to ЉWorking with Automated
Systems.Љ Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies which time-out a little too soon to
work properly with the UConnect™ system.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to ЉWorking
with Automated Systems.Љ
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
Working with Automated Systems
The ’Voice Recognition’ button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
recognition command immediately. For example, if a
prompt is playing ЉWould you like to pair a phone, clear
This method is designed to be used in instances where
one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone
keypad while navigating through an automated tele-
phone system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
aѧ,Љ you could press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and
say ЉPair a PhoneЉ to select that option without having to
listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
keypad and still use the UConnect™ system (while
dialing via the cell phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth™ cellular
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The UConnect™ system will work the
same as if you dial the number using voice recognition.
Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g. the UConnect™ sys-
tem will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉSetup Confirmations.Љ The UConnect™ system will
play the current confirmation prompt status and you
will be given the choice to change it.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send
the dial ring to the UConnect™ system to play it on the
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number, the user
may feel that the call did not go through even though the
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
hear the audio.
Phone and Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/ or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your cell phone, the UConnect™ system will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using UConnect™. The status is given for roaming net-
work signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Mute/Un-mute (Mute off)
When you mute the UConnect™ system, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the UConnect™ system:
•
Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83
•
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉMute.Љ
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
UConnect™ System and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively ЉconnectedЉ
with one electronic device at a time.
In order to un-mute the UConnect™ system:
•
•
Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.
3
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉMute-off.Љ
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Blue-
tooth™ connection between a UConnect™ paired cellular
phone and the UConnect™ system, follow the instruction
described in your cellular phone user’s manual.
Information Service
When using AT&T Wireless Service, dialing to phone
number Љ#121,Љ you can access voice activated automated
system to receive news, weather, stocks, traffic, etc.
related information.
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone pairing”.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
•
•
When prompted, say ЉList Phones.Љ
The UConnect™ system allows on going calls to be
transferred to your cellular phone to the UConnect™
system without terminating the call. To transfer an ongo-
ing call from your UConnect™ paired cellular phone to
the UConnect™ system or vice-versa, press the ’Voice
Recognition’ button and say ЉTransfer Call.Љ
The UConnect™ system will play the phone names of
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired
phone being announced, press the ЈVoice recognition’
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
button and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next
two sections for an alternate way to “select” or “de-
lete” a paired phone.
•
The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the UCon-
nect™ system will return to using the highest priority
phone present in or near (approximately with in 30
feet) the vehicle.
Select another Cellular Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone with the UConnect™ system. The phone must
have been previously paired to the UConnect™ system
that you want to use it with.
Delete UConnect™ Paired Cellular Phones
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉSetup Phone Pairing.Љ
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉSetup Select Phone.Љ
•
•
At the next prompt, say ЉDelete.Љ
The phone names along with priority numbers will be
announced.
•
•
The phone names along with priority numbers will be
announced.
•
When prompted say the priority number of the cellu-
lar phone you wish to delete. You can also press the
ЈVoice Recognition’ button anytime while the list is
being played and say the priority number of the phone
you wish to delete.
When prompted say the priority number of the cellu-
lar phone you wish to select. You can also press the
ЈVoice Recognition’ button anytime while the list is
being played, then say the priority number of the
phone that you wish to select.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
Things You Should Know About Your UConnect™
System
•
•
Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-
cents, the system may not always work for some.
Voice Recognition (VR)
When navigating through an automated system, such
as, voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say Љsend.Љ
•
•
Always wait for the beep before speaking.
3
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting approximately eight (8) feet
away from you.
•
•
•
Storing names in phonebook when vehicle is not in
motion is recommended.
•
•
Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice recognition period.
It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the UConnect™ phonebook.
Performance is maximized under:
UConnect™ phonebook name tag recognition rate is
optimized for the voice of the person who stored the
name in the phonebook.
•
•
•
•
•
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
low road noise,
•
•
You can say ЉOЉ (letter ЉOЉ) for Љ0Љ (zero). Љ800Љ must be
spoken Љeight-zero-zero.Љ
smooth road surface,
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
fully closed windows,
dry weather condition.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Far End Audio Performance
•
Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering
the in-vehicle audio volume.
•
Audio quality is maximized under:
Bluetooth Communication Link
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
low road noise,
Cellular phones have been found to occasionally lose
connection to the UConnect™ system. When this hap-
pens, the connection can generally be re-established by
switching the phone off/ on. Your cell phone is recom-
mended to remain in Bluetooth ЉonЉ mode.
smooth road surface,
fully closed windows, and
dry weather condition.
Operation from driver seat.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON
or ACC position, or after a reset, you must wait at least
five (5) seconds prior to using the system.
•
Performance, such as, audio clarity, echo. and loud-
ness to a large degree, rely on the phone and network,
and not the UConnect™ system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
SEATS
North American English
Primary
Alternate(s)
Oh
Power Seats
The power seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat
near the floor. Use this switch to move the driver’s seat
up or down, forward or rearward, or to tilt the seat. The
passenger’s seat will move up or down, forward or
rearward.
Zero
Add location
All
Add new
All of them
Confirmations prompts
Delete
Confirmation prompts
Delete a name
Language
Select language
List all
List names
List paired phones
Pager
List phones
Beeper
Phone pairing
Phonebook
Return to main menu
Select phone
Set up
Pairing
Phone book
Return. Main menu
select
Phone settings phone set
up
Power Seat Switch
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
3
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat as it may
cause damage to the seat controls.
Power Seat Recline Switch
WARNING!
Power Reclining Seats
The recliner control for both front seats is located on the
outboard side of the seat.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lumbar Support
The front driver’s and passenger seats are heated. The
controls for each heater are located near the bottom
center of the instrument panel. After turning on the
ignition, you can choose from High, Off, or Low heat
settings. Amber LEDs in the top portion of each switch
indicate the level of heat in use. Two LEDs are illumi-
nated for high, one for low, and none for off. Pressing the
switch once will select high-level heating.
This feature allows you to increase or decrease the
amount of lumbar support. Turn the control lever for-
ward to increase and rearward to decrease the desired
amount of lumbar support.
Lumbar Support Control Lever
Heated Seats — If Equipped
Heated seats, which are available only with leather
upholstery, provide comfort and warmth on cold days
and can help soothe sore muscles and backs. The heaters
provide the same heat level for both cushion and back.
Heated Seat Switch
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
Pressing the switch a second time will select low-level
heating. Pressing the switch a third time will shut the
heating elements off.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
When high-temperature heating is selected, the heaters
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation after heating is activated. The heat output
then drops to the normal high-temperature level. If
high-level heating is selected, the system will automati-
cally switch to the low level after two hours of continu-
ous operation. At that time, the number of illuminated
LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the change.
Operation on the low setting also turns off automatically
after two hours.
3
Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may
cause the seat heater to overheat.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Head Restraints
Folding Rear Seat
Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in
the event of impact from the rear. Adjustable restraints
should be adjusted so that the upper edge is as high as
practical.
The head restraints have a locking button which must be
pushed in to lower the head restraint. The restraints may
be raised without pushing in the button.
Folding Rear Seats
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an
additional storage area. Pull on the loops shown in the
illustration to fold down either or both seatbacks. These
loops can be tucked away when not in use.
When the seat back is folded to the upright position make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seat
back above the seat strap.
Adjustable Head Restraint
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
switch allows the driver to recall either of two pre-
programmed memory profiles by pressing the appropri-
ate side of the switch.
WARNING!
The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in an accident. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
3
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory
switch. Each memory profile contains desired driver seat,
side mirror, adjustable pedals (if equipped), and power
tilt and telescopic steering column (if equipped) position
settings, and a set of desired radio station presets.
Memory Switch
To Set The Memory Feature Follow These Steps:
The memory switch is located on the driver’s door panel.
The switch contains an (S) button to activate the memory
save function. It also contains a rocker switch labeled
with the number (1) and the number (2). The rocker
NOTE: Saving a new memory profile will erase an
existing profile from memory.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
1. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
ences (i.e. seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals [if
equipped], power tilt and telescopic steering column [if
equipped], and radio station presets).
NOTE: Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle
in Park, but the vehicle must be in Park to recall a
memory profile.
NOTE: The Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock
feature can be enabled through the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — if equipped. Refer to
“Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features)”
under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
Section 4 of this manual for details.
2. Press and release the Set (S) button on the memory
switch, then press the side of the rocker switch labeled (1)
within 5 seconds. The Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) — if equipped will display which memory
position is being set.
If desired, a second memory profile can be stored into
memory as follows:
Programming the Remote Keyless Transmitter for
the Memory Feature
Your Remote Keyless Entry Transmitters can be pro-
grammed to recall one of two pre-programmed memory
profiles by pressing the UNLOCK button on the Remote
Keyless Entry Transmitter.
1. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
ences (i.e. seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals [if
equipped], power tilt and telescopic steering column [if
equipped], and radio station presets).
To program your transmitters, perform the following:
1. Remove key from ignition.
2. Press and release the Set (S) button on the memory
switch, then press the side of the rocker switch labeled (2)
within 5 seconds. The Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) — if equipped will display which memory
position is being set.
2. Select desired memory profile 1 or 2.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
3. Press and release the Set (S) button on the memory
switch, then press and release the side of the rocker
switch labeled 1 or 2 accordingly. ЉMemory Profile Set” (1
or 2) will display in the instrument cluster on vehicles
equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC).
•
•
The seat cushion will move rearward about 2.4 inches
(60 mm) if the starting position of the seat is greater
than or equal to 3.5 inches (90 mm) forward of the rear
seat stop when the key is removed from the ignition
switch. The seat will return to its previously set
position when the key is placed into the ignition and
turned out of the LOCK position.
3
4. Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter
within 10 seconds.
The seat will move to the position located 1.2 inches
(30 mm) forward of the rear stop if the starting
position is between 2.4 inches to 3.5 inches (60 mm to
90 mm) forward of the rear stop when the key is
removed from the ignition switch. The seat will return
to its previously set position when the key is placed
into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position.
NOTE: Your transmitters can be unlinked to your
memory settings by pressing the Set (S) button followed
by the UNLOCK button on the transmitter in Step 4
above.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available with Memory Seat
Only)
The Easy Entry/ Easy Exit feature will be automatically
disabled if the seat is already positioned closer than 2.4
inches (60 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position
there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for
Easy Exit or Easy Entry.
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning
which will enhance driver mobility out of and into the
vehicle.
The distance the seat is moved is dependent on the
driver’s seat location once the key is removed from the
ignition.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Easy Entry/ Easy Exit feature is disabled
when the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
Entry/ Easy Exit feature can be enabled or disabled
through the programmable features in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Automati-
cally Move Seat Back on Exit” under “Personal Settings
(Customer Programmable Features)” under “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this
manual for details.
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows both the brake and accelerator pedal
to move toward or away from the driver to provide
improved position with the steering wheel. The adjust-
able pedal system is designed to allow a greater range of
driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position.
The switch is located on the front side of the driver’s seat
cushion side shield.
Adjustable Pedal Switch
Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward
(toward the front of the vehicle).
Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward
(toward the driver).
•
•
The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
The pedals can be adjusted while driving.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
•
The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in R
(Reverse) or when the Speed Control is ON. One of the
following message will display in the Electronic Ve-
hicle Information Center (EVIC) — if equipped if a
pedal adjustment is attempted when the system is
locked out: “Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise
Control Engaged” or “Adjustable Pedal Disabled —
Vehicle In Reverse.”
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood. First, pull
the hood release lever located under the left side of the
instrument panel.
3
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat,
you can use your remote keyless entry transmitter or the
memory switch on the driver’s door panel to return the
adjustable pedals to pre-programmed positions. Refer to
“Driver Memory Seat” in this section for details.
CAUTION!
Hood Release Lever
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become
limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in
the adjustable pedal’s path.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Next, move to the outside of the vehicle and push the
safety catch to the left. The safety catch is located under
the center front edge of the hood.
WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
You could have a collision. Be sure all hood latches
are fully latched before driving.
LIGHTS
Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the
overhead console. Each light is turned ON by pressing
the lens. Press the lens a second time to turn the light
OFF. The lights also turn on when a door is opened or the
dimmer control is turned fully upward, past the second
detent.
Hood Safety Catch
Use the hood prop rod (if equipped) to secure the hood in
the open position.
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 6
inches (15 cm) and then drop it. This should secure both
latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully
closed, with both latches engaged.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
Dimmer Control
The dimmer control is part of the
headlight switch, and is located on the
left side of the instrument panel. With
the parking lights or headlights on,
rotating the dimmer control upward
will increase the brightness of the in-
strument panel lights.
3
Dome Light Position
Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the
second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
position.
Overhead Console
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
Interior light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom “OFF”
position. The interior lights will remain off when the
doors are open.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the
interior lights were switched on manually or are on
because a door is open. This includes the glove box, but
not the trunk light. To restore interior light operation,
either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light
switch.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent.
This feature brightens all text displays such as the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
odometer, Electronic Vehicle Information Center — if
equipped, and radio when the parking lights or head-
lights are on.
Multi-Function Lever
The multi-function lever controls the operation of the
turn signals, headlight beam selection, and passing
lights. The lever is located on the left side of the steering
column.
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of
the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights,
instrument panel light dimming, interior lights, and fog
lights.
Multi-Function Lever
Headlight Switch
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
Headlights, Parking Lights, Instrument Panel
Lights
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Turn to the second detent for headlight, park light and
instrument panel light operation.
Automatic Headlights – If Equipped
This system automatically turns your headlights ON or
OFF based on ambient light levels. To turn the system ON,
rotate the headlight switch counter-clockwise to the AUTO
(A) position. When the system is ON, the Headlight Time
Delay feature is also ON. This means your headlights will
stay ON for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition
switch OFF. To turn the Automatic System OFF, move the
headlight switch out of the AUTO (A) position.
3
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-
lights will come ON in the Automatic mode.
Headlights On With Wipers (Available with Auto
Headlights Only)
The headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds
after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is
placed in the AUTO position. The headlights will also
turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were
turned on by this feature. This feature can be turned on or
off using the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — If equipped. Refer to ”Headlights On With
Wipers” in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
section of this manual for details.
Headlight Switch
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
SmartBeams — If Equipped
To Deactivate
The SmartBeam system provides increased forward light-
ing at night by automating high beam control through
the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside
rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific light
and automatically switches from high beams to low
beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
Perform either of the following steps to deactivate the
SmartBeam system.
1. Pull the Multi-Function Lever towards you to switch
the headlights from the HIGH BEAM to the LOW BEAM
position.
2. Rotate the headlight switch clockwise from the AUTO
(A) to the ON position.
To Activate
1. Select “Automatic High Beams — ON” with the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“EVIC — Personal Settings” in Section 4 of this manual
for details.
NOTE: Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause
headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle).
Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions on the windshield
or camera lens will cause the system to function improp-
erly.
2. Rotate the headlight switch counter-clockwise to the
AUTO (A) position.
3. Push the Multi-Function Lever away from you to
switch the headlights to HIGH BEAM position.
Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only)
The high beam headlights will come on as Daytime
Running Lights whenever the ignition switch is on, the
headlights are off, and the parking brake is off. The
headlight switch must be used for normal night time
driving.
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
at or above 25 mph (40 km/ h).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
Lights-on Reminder
(EVIC). Refer to “Delay Turning Headlights Off” in the
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver
when the driver’s door is opened.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center section for details.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is on the headlight
switch below the dimmer control. To activate the
front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or the
low beam headlights and press the fog light switch.
Headlight Time Delay
3
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your ve-
hicle in an unlighted area.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights, or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
To activate the delay feature, turn off the ignition switch
while the headlights are still on. Then turn off the
headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins
when headlight switch is turned off. If the headlights or
park lights are turned back on or the ignition switch is
turned on, the delay will be cancelled.
Turn Signals
Move the Multi-Function Lever up or down and the
arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to
show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal
lights. You can signal a lane change by moving the lever
partially up or down without moving beyond the detent.
Releasing the lever at the detent will provide 3 flashes.
If the headlights are turned off before the ignition, they
will turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds
of turning the ignition off to activate this feature
If either light has a very fast flash rate, check for a
defective outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light
when the lever is moved, it would suggest that the fuse
or indicator is defective or there may be a circuit failure.
The Headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles
equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The message “Turn Signal On” will appear in
the electronic vehicle information center (EVIC) — if
equipped, and a continuous chime will be heard when
the vehicle has been driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km)
with either turn signal on.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The wipers and washers are operated by the
multi-function lever. The lever is located on the
left side of the steering column. Rotate the end of
the control lever to select the desired wiper speed.
Highbeam/Lowbeam Select Switch
Push the Multi-Function Lever away from you to switch
the headlights to HIGH beam. Pull the Lever towards
you to switch the headlights back to LOW beam.
CAUTION!
Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper switch is
left in any position other than OFF.
Flash to Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the Multi-Function Lever toward you.
This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam
and remain on until the lever is released.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
Rain Sensing Wipers—If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multi-function lever to one of six settings
to activate this feature.
3
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multi-function lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position 6 is the most sensi-
tive. Settings 3-4 should be used for normal rain condi-
tions. Settings 2 or 1 can be used if the driver desires less
wiper sensitivity. Settings 5 and 6 can be used if the
driver desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in
the OFF position when not using the system.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
Windshield Washers
To use the front washer, push the lever in and hold while
spray is desired. If the lever is released while in the delay
range, the wiper will operate for two wipe cycles after the
lever is released, and then resume the intermittent inter-
val previously selected.
NOTE:
•
The rain sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the LOW or HIGH speed position.
•
On some vehicles the rain sensing feature will not
operate when the gear selector is placed in the NEU-
TRAL position.
If the lever is pushed while in the OFF position, the
wipers will operate for two wipe cycles, then turn OFF.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
The rain sensing feature may not function properly
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the wind-
shield.
•
Neutral Wipe Inhibit — When the ignition is ON and
while the transmission shift lever is in the N (Neutral)
position, and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8
k/ mh), the rain sensing feature will be suspended
unless the wiper switch is moved or the shift lever is
moved out of the N (Neutral) position.
•
•
Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce rain sensor performance.
A customer programmable feature in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) allows the Rain
Sense feature to be turned off. Refer to “Personal
Settings” in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
section of this manual for details.
Mist Feature
Push the wiper lever in to activate a single wipe to clear
off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. As long as
the lever is pushed in, the wipers will continue to
operate.
The rain sensing system has protection features for the
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
Headlights On With Wipers (Available with Auto
Headlights Only)
The headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds
after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is
placed in the AUTO position. The headlights will also
turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were
turned on by this feature. This feature can be turned on or
off using the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — If equipped. Refer to ”Headlights On With
Wipers” in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
section of this manual for details.
•
Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — When the ignition
is first switched ON and the vehicle is stationary, and
the outside temperature is below 32° F (0° C), the rain
sensing feature will be suspended unless the wiper
switch is moved, or the vehicle speed becomes greater
than 0 mph (0 km/ h), or the outside temperature rises
above freezing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever to the second detent for Low
speed wiper operation, or to the third detent for High
speed operation.
Intermittent Wiper System
3
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause be-
tween cycles, desirable. Rotate the end of the lever to the
first detent position, then turn the end of the lever to
select the desired delay interval. There are 6 possible
delay wiper positions. The delay can be regulated from a
maximum of approximately 23 seconds between cycles,
to a cycle every second.
Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir
The fluid reservoir will hold 1 gallon (3.8L) of washer
fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid” appears in
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — if
equipped.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
front of the engine compartment on the passenger side of
the vehicle. Be sure to check for fluid level in the reservoir
at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield
washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the
system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Headlight Washers — If Equipped
This feature operates in combination with the windshield
washers. To use the headlight washers, turn the head-
lights ON and press in on the windshield washer control
knob while the engine is running.
Headlight Washer
Adding Washer Fluid
The headlight washer and windshield washer share the
same fluid reservoir. The reservoir is located in the front
of the engine compartment on the passenger side of the
vehicle. Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at
regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield
washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the
system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
This will operate the windshield washers and direct a
timed high pressure spray onto the headlight lens.
NOTE: The headlight washers will operate on the first
spray of the windshield washers, then every fourth spray
of the windshield washers after that.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
3
Headlight Washer Fluid Reservoir
Tilt Steering Column Control
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
WARNING!
Unlock the steering column by pulling out the handle
located directly below the column. To tilt the column
move the steering wheel up or down as desired. To
lengthen or shorten the steering column pull out or push
in the steering wheel. Lock the steering column in
position by pushing the handle in until it fully engages.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. The
telescoping adjustment must be locked while driv-
ing. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving, or
driving without the telescoping adjustment locked
could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
— IF EQUIPPED
The power tilt/ telescoping steering column lever is lo-
cated below the multi-function lever on the steering
column. To tilt the column move the lever up or down as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull
the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as
desired.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory
Seat, you can use your remote keyless entry transmitter
or the memory switch on the driver’s door panel to
return the tilt/ telescopic steering column to pre-
programmed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat”
in this section for details.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering
WARNING!
Moving the steering column while the vehicle is
moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering col-
umn you could lose control of the vehicle and have
an accident. Adjust the column only while the ve-
hicle is stopped.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS) — IF
EQUIPPED
The traction control system (TCS) warning
light is located in the instrument cluster. The
TCS light will flash as soon as the tires lose
traction and the wheels begin to spin. This
WARNING!
indicates that the TCS system is active. If the TCS
warning light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up
on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions. When the TCS warning light is illumi-
nated continuously, the TCS is switched off. To return to
the enhanced vehicle stability offered by TCS, press the
traction control switch (the TCS warning light in the
instrument cluster goes out). Avoid spinning one drive
wheel. This may cause serious damage to the drive train.
3
TCS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
afforded. The TCS cannot prevent accidents, includ-
ing those resulting from excessive speed in turns, or
hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of a
TCS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar-
dize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
The traction control switch is located on the center of the
instrument panel. To turn the traction control system OFF
press the traction control switch until the traction control
Indicator in the instrument cluster lights up.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving with
snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or gravel,
switch off the TCS system by pressing the traction control
switch.
To turn the system back ON, press the traction control
switch a second time until the traction control Indicator
turns OFF.
NOTE:
•
The traction control system comes on each time the
ignition switch is turned ON. This will occur even if
you used the switch to turn the system OFF.
•
The Traction Control system will make buzzing or
clicking sounds when in operation.
REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system is used to help drivers determine if an
obstacle is in the way of the vehicle while it is backing up
in addition to the use of inside rearview and outside
mirrors.
Traction Control Switch
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
When the driver selects Reverse the system scans for
objects behind the vehicle using four sensors located in
the rear bumper. Objects can be detected from up to 71
inches (180 cm). A warning display above the rear
window provides both visible and audible warnings
indicating the range of the object.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Rear Park Assist System. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury
or death.
3
The display contains two sets of yellow and red LEDs
that can be viewed from the driver seat using the rear
view mirror. Each side of the vehicle has its own warning
LEDs. The system provides a visual warning by illumi-
nating one or more yellow LEDs as the vehicle gets closer
to the object. As the vehicle continues to approaches the
object, one red LED is illuminated and the system emits
a series of short beeps. The tone will remain constant and
both red LEDs are illuminated once the vehicle is within
12 inches (30.5 cm) of the object.
Rear Park Assist Indicator
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Rear Park Assist System displays the outer
most yellow LED’s at a slightly dimmer level to indicate
that the system is ON.
BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM (BAS) — IF EQUIPPED
BAS is standard on vehicles equipped with electronic
stability program (ESP). The BAS is designed to optimize
the vehicle’s braking capability during emergency brak-
ing maneuvers. The system applies optimum pressure to
the brakes in emergency braking conditions than might
otherwise be afforded solely by the driver’s braking style.
This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS comple-
ments the antilock brake system (ABS). Applying the
brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To
receive the benefit of the system, you must apply con-
tinuous braking power during the stopping sequence. Do
not reduce brake pedal pressure.
NOTE: When an audio tone is indicated by the Rear
Park Assist display the system will MUTE the radio if it
is turned on.
The system can be turned on or off through the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) when the vehicle is in
PARK. Refer to “Personal Settings” in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center section of this manual for
details.
NOTE:
•
Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris
to keep the system operating properly.
•
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of the system.
If “Service Park Assist System” appears in the EVIC after
making sure the rear bumper is clean please see your
authorized dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
the ESP/ BAS malfunction indicator light comes on con-
tinuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system. If this
light stays illuminated, have the ESP and BAS checked at
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING!
BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of
the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
dents. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
3
ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM (ESP) — IF
EQUIPPED
WARNING!
ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
afforded. The ESP cannot prevent accidents, includ-
ing those resulting from excessive speed in turns, or
hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an
ESP-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar-
dize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
The malfunction indicator light for the ESP is
combined with BAS. The yellow ESP/ BAS
malfunction indicator light and the yellow ESP
warning light in the instrument cluster both
come on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position. They should go out with the engine running. If
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The ESP enhances directional control and reduces driving
wheel spin of the vehicle under various driving condi-
tions. The system operates when the vehicle speed is
greater than 7.8 mph (12.6 km/ h).
To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving with
snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or gravel,
switch off the ESP system by pressing the ESP switch.
The ESP system corrects for over/ understeering of the
vehicle by applying brakes to the appropriate wheel.
Engine torque is also limited.
The ESP warning light, located in the instru-
ment cluster, starts to flash as soon as the ESP
system sensor’s information varies from the
driver’s intended path. The ESP warning light
also flashes when traction control is activated. If the ESP
warning light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up
on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions. When the ESP warning light is illumi-
nated continuously, the ESP is switched off. To return to
the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP, press the
ESP switch (the ESP warning light in the instrument
cluster goes out). Avoid spinning one drive wheel. This
may cause serious damage to the drive train.
ESP OFF Button
With the ESP system switched off, the engine torque
reduction feature is cancelled. Therefore, the enhanced
vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable. ESP al-
ways operates under braking, even with the switch in the
OFF position. When the ESP system is disabled (if one
drive wheel loses traction and begins to spin) the brake is
applied by the ESP system to control wheel slip. This
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
wheel slip control is active at vehicle speeds between
approximately 24 mph (40 km/ h) and 50 mph (80 km/ h).
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, this device takes over the accelerator
operation at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/ h). The
speed control switch consists of a stalk mounted lever
located on the steering column.
CAUTION!
3
If the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised, the
engine must be shut off (key in the ignition switch to
the OFF/LOCK or ACC position). Otherwise the ESP
will immediately be engaged and will apply the rear
wheel brakes.
Synchronizing ESP
The malfunction indicator light for the ESP is
combined with BAS. If the power supply was
interrupted (battery disconnected or dis-
charged), the ESP/ BAS malfunction indicator
light may be illuminated with the engine running. Turn
the steering wheel completely to the left and then to the
right. The ESP/ BAS malfunction indicator light should
go out.
Speed Control Lever
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Activate:
To Deactivate:
Push and release the speed control lever (“ON/
OFF”) once and the electronic speed control
indicator light in the instrument cluster will
illuminate indicating that the electronic speed
control is ON. To turn the system OFF, Push and release
the lever (“ON/ OFF”) again and the system and indica-
tor will turn off.
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the lever away
from you (“CANCEL”) or normal braking while slowing
the vehicle will deactivate the speed control without
erasing the memory. Pushing and releasing the lever
(“ON/ OFF”) or turning off the ignition erases the speed
memory.
To Resume Speed:
To Set At A Desired Speed:
To resume a previously set speed, push the lever up and
release (“ACC/ RES”). Resume can be used at any speed
above 20 mph (32 km/ h).
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, pull the
lever toward you and release. Release the accelerator and
the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
To Vary the Speed Setting:
When the speed control is set, speed can be increased by
pushing the lever up and holding (“ACC/ RES”). When
the lever is released, a new set speed will be established.
NOTE: Speed control will only function in third, fourth,
or fifth gear when in the Autostick Mode — if equipped.
NOTE: The speed control may not engage if a different
size tire is installed on one wheel, such as the compact
spare tire.
Pushing the lever up and releasing (“ACC/ RES”) once
will result in a 1 mph (1.6 km/ h) speed increase. Each
time the lever is pushed up and released, speed increases
so that pushing the lever up and releasing three times
will increase speed by 3 mph (4.8 km/ h), etc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
To decrease speed while speed control is set, push the
lever down and hold (“COAST”). Release the lever when
the desired speed is reached, and the new speed will be
set.
On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without speed control.
WARNING!
Pushing down and releasing the lever (“COAST”) once
will result in a 1 mph (2 km/ h) speed decrease. Each time
the lever is pushed down and released, speed decreases.
3
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
can’t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control. An accident could be the result. Don’t use
Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.
To Accelerate For Passing:
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
NOTE: The speed control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
is normal.
Four speed automatic transmissions will experience a
downshift to 3rd gear while climbing uphill or descend-
ing downhill. This downshift to 3rd gear is necessary to
maintain vehicle set speed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
OVERHEAD CONSOLE — IF EQUIPPED
The overhead console contains courtesy/ reading lights,
an optional universal garage door opener (HomeLink),
storage for sunglasses, and an optional power sunroof
switch.
Courtesy/Reading Lights
At the forward end of the console are two courtesy/
reading lights.
Press the lens to turn these lights on. Press a second time
to turn the lights off.
The lights also turn on when a front door or rear door is
opened. The lights will also turn on when the unlock
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed.
Sunglasses Storage
At the rear of the console a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses.
The storage compartment access is a Љpush/ pushЉ design.
Push the finger depression on the overhead console to
open. Push the finger depression to close.
Overhead Console
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver replaces up to
three remote controls (hand held transmitters) that oper-
ate devices such as garage door openers, motorized
gates, or home lighting. It triggers these devices at the
push of a button. The Universal Transceiver operates off
your vehicle’s battery and charging system; no batteries
are needed.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver. Do
not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the
path of the door or gate. A moving door or gate can
cause serious injury or death to people and pets or
damage to objects.
3
NOTE: The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is dis-
abled when the Vehicle Theft Alarm is active.
WARNING!
For additional information on HomeLink, call 1–800–
355–3515, or on the internet at www.homelink.com.
A moving garage door can cause injury to people and
pets in the path of the door. People or pets could be
seriously or fatally injured. Only use this transceiver
with a garage door opener that has a “stop and
reverse” feature as required by federal safety stan-
dards. This includes most garage door opener mod-
els manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage
door opener without these safety features it could
cause injury or death. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515
or, on the Internet at www.homelink.com for safety
information or assistance.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-
ous gas. Do not run the vehicle’s exhaust while
training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause seri-
ous injury or death.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Programming HomeLink
NOTE: When programming a garage door opener, it is
advised to park outside the garage. It is also recom-
mended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being programmed to
HomeLink for quicker training and accurate transmis-
sion of the radio-frequency signal.
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures
a
driver-interactive display which includes
HomeLink system messages. The EVIC is located in the
upper part of the cluster between the speedometer and
tachometer.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center
1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons, and
release only when the EVIC display shows “Channels
Cleared” (after 20 seconds). Do not hold the buttons for
longer than 30 seconds and do not repeat step one to
program a second and/ or third hand-held transmitter to
the remaining two HomeLink buttons.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers
may require you to replace this Programming Step 3 with
procedures noted in the ЉGate Operator/ Canadian Pro-
grammingЉ section.
4. The EVIC display will show “Channel X Training”
(where X is Channel 1, 2, or 3). Release both buttons after
the EVIC display shows “Channel X Trained”.
3
NOTE: If the EVIC display shows “Did Not Train”
repeat steps 2–4.
5. Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and
observe the EVIC display. If the EVIC display shows
“Channel X Transmit” (where X is Channel 1, 2, or 3),
programming is complete and your device should acti-
vate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released.
HomeLink Buttons
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1-3
inches (3-8 cm) away from the HomeLink buttons.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink
button that you want to train and the hand-held trans-
mitter buttons. Do not release the buttons until step 4
has been completed.
NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLink but-
tons, begin with ЉProgrammingЉ step two. Do not repeat
step one.
NOTE: If your hand-held transmitter appears to pro-
gram the universal transceiver, but your garage door
does not operate using the transmitter and your garage
door opener was manufactured after 1995, your garage
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
door opener may have a multiple security code system
(rolling code system). Please proceed to steps 6–8 to
complete the programming of a rolling code equipped
device (most common garage door openers require this
step.
HomeLink should now activate your rolling code
equipped device.
NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLink but-
tons, begin with ЉProgrammingЉ step two. Do not repeat
step one. For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.
6. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit)
in the garage, locate the ЉlearnЉ or ЉsmartЉ button. This
can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the motor-head unit.
Canadian Programming/Gate Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to Љtime-outЉ (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to Љtime-outЉ in the same manner.
7. Firmly press and release the ЉlearnЉ or ЉsmartЉ button.
(The name and color of the button may vary by manu-
facturer.)
NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step
eight.
If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties
programming a gate operator by using the ЉProgram-
mingЉ procedures (regardless of where you live), replace
؆Programming HomeLink؆ step 3 with the following:
8. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two
seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button.
Repeat the ؆press/hold/release؆ sequence a second time,
and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener
(or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this
sequence a third time to complete the programming.
NOTE: If programming a garage door opener or gate
operator, it is advised to unplug the device during the
ЉcyclingЉ process to prevent possible overheating.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button
while you press and release every two seconds (ЉcycleЉ)
your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has
successfully been accepted by HomeLink. The EVIC
display will show “Channel X Trained” (where X is
Channel 1, 2, or 3). Proceed with ЉProgrammingЉ step
four to complete.
•
Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons and
release only when the EVIC display shows “Channels
Cleared” (after 20 seconds). Release both buttons. Do
not hold for longer that 30 seconds. HomeLink is now
in the train (or learning) mode and can be pro-
grammed at any time beginning with ЉProgrammingЉ
- step 2.
3
Using HomeLink
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button
To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink
button previously trained, follow these steps:
To operate, simply press and release the programmed
HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/ office lighting,
etc.). For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the
device may also be used at any time. In the event that
there are still programming difficulties or questions,
contact HomeLink at: www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-
3515.
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. Do
NOT release the button.
2. The EVIC display will show “Channel X Transmit”
(where X is Channel 1, 2, or 3) for 20 seconds and then
change to “Channel X Training”. Without releasing the
HomeLink button, proceed with ЉProgrammingЉ step 2.
Erasing HomeLink Buttons
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink at:
To erase programming from the three buttons (individual
buttons cannot be erased but can be ЉreprogrammedЉ -
note below), follow the step noted:
www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Security
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the frequencies
by following the “Erasing HomeLink Buttons” instruc-
tions in this section.
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undes-
ired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Power Sunroof Controls
HomeLink is a trademark owned by Johnson Controls,
Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
Opening Sunroof - Express
WARNING!
Press the switch rearward and release, and the sunroof
will open automatically from any position. The sunroof
will open fully, then stop automatically. This is called
Express Open. During Express Open operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
•
Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
3
Closing Sunroof - Express
Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof
will close automatically from any position. The sunroof
will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
Express Close. During Express Close operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
•
•
In an accident, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
Pinch Protect Feature
Do not allow small children to operate the sun-
roof. Never allow fingers or other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pinch Protect Override
Wind Buffeting
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing,
press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after
the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof to move
towards the closed position.
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is
pressed.
Venting Sunroof - Express
Press and release the ЉVЉ button, and the sunroof will
open to the vent position. This is called Express Vent, and
will occur regardless of sunroof position. During Express
Vent operation, any movement of the switch will stop the
sunroof.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
Ignition Off Operation
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power sunroof switch
will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch
is turned off. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
There are two 12-volt electrical outlets on this vehicle.
Both of the outlets are protected by a fuse.
The 12 volt power outlet next to the ash receiver tray (if
equipped with an optional Smoker’s Package) has power
available only when the ignition is on. This outlet will
also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit.
3
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power sunroof
switch will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned off. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature. The time is programmable
through the EVIC. Refer to “Delay Power Off to Acces-
sories Until Exit” under “Personal Settings (Customer
Programmable Features)” under “Electronic Vehicle In-
formation Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual for
details.
WARNING!
Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on
the center console on vehicles not equipped with the
ash receiver tray. A fire leading to bodily injury
could result.
Sunroof Fully Closed
Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the
sunroof is fully closed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If desired, the power outlet next to the ash
receiver tray (if equipped) can be converted by your
authorized dealer to provide power with the ignition
switch in the LOCK position.
The center console outlet is powered directly from the
battery (power available at all times). Items plugged into
this outlet may discharge the battery and/ or prevent
engine starting.
Front Power Outlet
Center Console Power Outlet
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off
CUP HOLDERS
Front Seat Cup Holders — Standard
The cup holders are located in the forward edge of the
center console.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e. cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent engine starting.
3
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e. coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
Front Seat Cup Holders
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or acces-
sory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Seat Cup Holders — 300 Touring and 300C
Rear Seat Cup Holders
Models
The rear seat cup holders are located in the center armrest
between the rear seats. The cup holders are positioned
forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide
convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while
maintaining a resting place for the rear occupants’ el-
bows.
The cup holders are located in the forward edge of the
center console.
Push down on the cover as shown to expose the cup
holders. Close the cover when the cup holders are no
longer needed.
Rear Seat Cup Holders
Front Seat Cup Holders
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
STORAGE
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks
The tie-downs located on cargo area floor and on the rear
trim panels should be used to safely secure loads when
vehicle is moving.
Console Features
The center console contains a large storage bin. The
storage bin contains a four-slot coin holder (designed to
hold various size coins) and a rubber mat at the bottom of
the bin for noise control. The bin is large enough to hold
a portable AC/ DC converter to power laptops, games, or
other electrical equipment. Two slots at the top right side
of the bin provide clearance for power cords to pass
conveniently out of the bin with the lid closed. This
feature is ideal for games, laptops, cell phones, or other
electrical equipment. The console’s front-opening lid
allows for easy access to the storage bin for the both the
driver and the front passenger. The inside portion of the
arm rest lid contains a penholder, a tissue holder, and a
tire gauge holder.
3
WARNING!
•
•
Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or colli-
sion a hook could pull loose and allow the child
seat to come loose. A child could be badly injured.
Use only the anchors provided for child seat
tethers.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers
can change the vehicle center of gravity and
vehicle handling. To avoid loss of control result-
ing in personal injury, follow these guidelines for
loading your vehicle:
In addition to the internal storage, the console contains
two shift bezel cubby bins with rubber mats for holding
small items. For vehicles not equipped with navigation
radio, the console also contains an extra storage bin
located below the climate control, which holds up to four
CD jewel cases.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
•
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The automatic load leveling system will provide a level
riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading
conditions.
Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the
vehicle to sway.
A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers
raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes
approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling
to complete depending on road surface conditions.
•
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15
hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The
vehicle must be driven to reset the system.
WARNING!
To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and
use seat belts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
138 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
5. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
1. Electronic Speed Control Indicator Light — If
Equipped
6. Electronic Vehicle Information Center Display
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display shows
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) messages.
(See page 150 for more information.) (only on vehicles
equipped with steering wheel mounted switches).
This light will illuminate when the electronic
speed control is ON.
4
2. Low Fuel Indicator Light
NOTE: On non-EVIC equipped vehicles the odometer
is located here.
When the fuel level drops to 1/ 8 tank, the fuel
symbol will light and a single chime will sound.
7. Tachometer
3. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This light shows the front fog lights are ON.
(See page 105 for more information.)
The red segments indicate the maximum permissible
engine revolutions-per-minute (r.p.m. x 1000) for each
gear range. Before reaching the red area, ease up on the
accelerator.
4. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
when the turn signal lever is operated.
8. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light illuminates, and will be accompanied
by a single chime to warn of an overheated
engine condition. The engine temperature is
critically hot, and the vehicle should be turned off
immediately. The vehicle should be serviced as soon
as possible.
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has
traveled about one mile with the turn signals on, a chime
will sound to alert you to turn the signals off. If either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check for a defective
outside light bulb. (See page 105 for more information.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
144 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
9. Anti-Lock Brake Light
running. If this light comes on continuously with the
engine running, a malfunction has been detected in
either the ESP or the BAS system. If the light stays
illuminated, have the ESP and BAS checked at your
authorized dealer as soon as possible. (See page 119
for more information.)
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System.
The light will turn on when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as
long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
11. Airbag Light
This light turns on and remains on for 6 to 8
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned ON. If the light is not
on during starting, stays on, or turns on
while driving, have the system inspected by an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible. (See page 51 for more
information.)
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
light inspected by an authorized dealer.
12. Brake System Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking
brake application. If the brake light turns on,
it may indicate that the parking brake is
applied, there is a low brake fluid level or there is a
problem with the anti-lock brake system.
10. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Warning
Light/Brake Assist System (BAS) Warning Light —
If Equipped
The yellow ESP/ BAS warning light in the
instrument cluster comes on when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position.
The light should go out with the engine
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. Failure of either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
Vehicles equipped with Anti-Lock brakes (ABS), are also
equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD).
In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light
will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair
to the ABS system is required.
The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to
the ON position. The light should illuminate for approxi-
mately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected.
If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected
by an authorized dealer.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
4
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger-
ous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have an
accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
13. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator
Light/Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator Light
— If Equipped
If this indicator light flashes during accelera-
tion, apply as little throttle as possible. While
driving, ease up on the accelerator. Adapt
your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions, and do not switch off the ESP, or TCS
— if equipped. (See page 117 for more information.)
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads (H),
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H”, and you hear continuous chimes, turn the
engine off immediately, and call for service.
14. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, see Section 7 of this manual. Follow
the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure
Cap paragraph.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147
15. Trip Odometer Button
17. Transmission Range Indicator
This display indicator shows the automatic transmission
gear selection.
Trip Odometer Button — Standard Cluster
The word ЉTRIPЉ will appear when this button is pressed.
Push in and hold the button for two seconds when the
trip odometer is displayed to reset it to 0 miles or
kilometers. A second press of the button will display the
outside temperature in the odometer.
18. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this
light will turn on for 5 to 8 seconds as a bulb
check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s or
front passenger’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will
sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the
driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt remains unbuck-
led, the Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on
continuously. (See page 37 for more information.)
4
Trip Odometer Button — Premium Cluster
Press this button to change the display from odometer to
either of the two trip odometer settings. The letter “A” or
“B” will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Push in
and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip
odometer to 0 miles or kilometers. The odometer must be
in trip mode to reset.
19. Vehicle Theft Alarm (VTA) Indicator Light — If
Equipped
The VTA indicator Light flashes rapidly when the VTA is
arming, and slowly when the VTA is armed. (See page 25
for more information.)
16. High Beam Light
This light shows that the headlights are on high
beam. Push the Multi-Function lever away from
the steering wheel to switch the headlights to high
beam.
20. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
21. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
22. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If
Equipped
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control system. If a prob-
lem is detected the light will come on while
the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recom-
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label, you should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
when the vehicle has completely stopped and the gear
selector is placed in the PARK position. The light
should turn off. If the light remains lit with the engine
running your vehicle will usually be drivable, how-
ever, see your dealer for service as soon as possible. If
the light is flashing when the engine is running,
immediate service is required and you may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/ rough idle or en-
gine stall and your vehicle may require towing. The
light will come on when the ignition is first turned on
and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does
not come on during starting, have the system checked
by an authorized dealer.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord-
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
The Malfunction Indicator Light flashes to alert you to
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs. (See
page 295 for more information.)
23. Voltage Light
This light monitors the electrical system volt-
age. The light should turn on momentarily as
the engine is started. If the light stays on or turns on
while driving, it indicates a problem with the charging
system. Immediate service should be obtained.
4
25. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light shows low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the
engine is started. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as
possible. A single chime will sound when this light
turns on.
24. Malfunction Indicator Light
This light is part of an onboard diagnostic
system called OBD that monitors engine and
automatic transmission control systems. The
light will illuminate when the key is in the ON
position before engine start. If the bulb does not come
on when turning the key from OFF to ON, have the
condition checked promptly.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked using the procedure
shown in section 7. (See page 298 for more information.)
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc. may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Vehicle information warning message displays
Tire Pressure Monitor System (if equipped)
Personal Settings (customer programmable features)
Compass display
Outside temperature display
Trip computer functions
UConnect™ hands-free communication system dis-
plays (if equipped)
•
•
Navigation system screens (if equipped)
Audio mode display
Electronic Vehicle Information Center
The system allows the driver to select information by
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display. It is located in the
upper part of the cluster between the speedometer and
tachometer. Vehicles equipped with steering wheel
mounted buttons (described in this section) are also
equipped with the EVIC. The EVIC consists of the
following:
Press and release the MENU button and the
mode displayed will change between Trip
Functions, Navigation (if equipped), System
Status, Personal Settings, and Telephone (if
equipped).
MENU
Button
•
System Status
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151
Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to accept
a selection. The FUNCTION SELECT button
also advances the radio to the next preset
station, changes the side of the tape being
played (if so equipped), or changes the current
CD track being played (if so equipped) when
the EVIC is in the Compass/ Temp/ Audio
screen.
Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip
Functions, Navigation (if equipped), System
Status Messages, and Personal Settings (Cus-
tomer Programmable Features). The SCROLL
button also seeks up and down the radio
stations, CD track numbers (if so equipped), or
If Compass/ Temp/ Audio is already displayed when the
AUDIO MODE button is pressed, then the radio mode
will change from AM to FM, to Tape, to CD, or to Satellite
(SAT) accordingly.
FUNC-
TION
SELECT
Button
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
When the appropriate conditions exist, the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays the following
messages:
4
•
•
•
•
Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime)
Left Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
SCROLL
Button
satellite radio channels (if so equipped) when the EVIC is
in the Compass/ Temp/ Audio screen.
Right Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single
chime)
Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the
Compass/ Temp/ Audio screen. This screen
displays radio station frequencies, any one of
twelve radio station preset frequencies, CD
disc number, CD track number, tape, or any
one of 200 Satellite radio channels depending
on which radio is in the vehicle.
•
•
•
•
Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
RKE Battery Low (with a single chime)
Memory #1/ #2 Profile Set
AUDIO
MODE
Button
Memory #1/ #2 Profile Recall
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
•
Memory System Disabled – Vehicle Not In Park (with
a single chime)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Channel 1, 2, OR 3 Transmit
Channel 1, 2, OR 3 Training
Channel 1, 2, OR 3 Trained
Clearing Channels
Memory System Disabled – Seat Belt Buckled (with a
single chime)
•
•
Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not in Park
Channels Cleared
Left/ Right Front Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
chime if speed is above 1 mph)
Channels Defaulted
•
•
Left/ Right Rear Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
chime if speed is above 1 mph)
Did Not Train
Left Front Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer to
“Starting And Operating, Tire Section”
Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in
motion)
•
•
•
•
Left Rear Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer to
“Starting And Operating, Tire Section”
•
•
•
Trunk Ajar (with a single chime)
Low Washer Fluid (with a single chime)
Right Front Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer
to “Starting And Operating, Tire Section”
Adjustable Pedals Disabled – Cruise Engaged (with a
single chime) — only available on vehicles equipped
with memory seats.
Right Rear Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer
to “Starting And Operating, Tire Section”
•
Adjustable Pedals Disabled – Vehicle In Reverse (with
a single chime) — only available on vehicles equipped
with memory seats.
Check TPM System (with a single chime). Refer to
“Starting And Operating, Tire Section”
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153
•
•
Check Gascap (refer to “Adding Fuel” in Section 5 of
this manual for more details)
The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa-
tion:
Service Park Assist System (with a single chime)
•
Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
continue from the last fuel average reading before the
reset.
Trip Functions
Press and release the MENU button until one of the
following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC:
4
•
•
•
•
•
•
Average Fuel Economy
Distance To Empty
Trip A
•
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be travelled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION
SELECT button.
Trip B
Elapsed Time
Display Units of Measure in
Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip
Computer functions.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will
change to a text display of ЉLOW FUEL.Љ This display
will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding
a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off
the ЉLOW FUELЉ text and a new DTE value will
display.
To Reset The Display
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button once to clear the resettable function being dis-
played. To reset all resettable functions, press and release
the FUNCTION SELECT button a second time within 3
seconds of resetting the currently displayed function
(>Reset ALL will display during this 3 second window).
•
Trip A
Shows the total distance travelled for trip A since the last
Compass Display
reset.
The compass readings indicate the direction
the vehicle is facing. Press and release the
compass button to display one of eight com-
pass readings and the outside temperature.
•
Trip B
Shows the total distance travelled for trip B since the last
reset.
Automatic Compass Calibration
•
Elapsed Time
This compass is self calibrating, which eliminates the
need to manually set the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated. You may
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more
360° turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic
objects) until the “CAL” message displayed in the EVIC
turns off. The compass will now function normally.
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
•
Display Units of Measure in:
To make your selection, press and release the FUNC-
TION SELECT button until “US” or “METRIC” appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” message
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows:
To put into a Calibration Mode: Turn on the ignition
switch. Then, press and hold the compass button for
approximately 2 seconds. Then, press the SCROLL button
until “Calibrate Compass” displays in the EVIC. Then,
press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to start
the calibration. The message “CAL” will display in the
EVIC. Complete one or more 360° turns (in an area free from
large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL” message
turns off. The compass will now function normally.
4
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
North and Geographic North. In some areas of the
country, the difference between magnetic and geographic
North is great enough to cause the compass to give false
readings. If this occurs, the compass variance must be set.
NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from
the overhead console. This is where the compass sensor is
located.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To set the variance: Turn the ignition switch ON. Then,
press and hold the compass button for approximately 2
seconds. Then, press the SCROLL button until “Compass
Variance” displays in the EVIC. Both the “Compass
Variance” message and the last variance zone number
will display in the EVIC. Then, press and release FUNC-
TION SELECT button until the proper variance zone is
selected according to the map. Finally, press and release
the compass button to exit.
When the appropriate conditions exist, and if supported
by the cell phone, the EVIC will display the following
telephone symbols:
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate the
signal strength of the UConnect™ phone. The
number of horizontal bars increase as the
strength of the UConnect™ phone signal in-
creases.
Signal
Strength
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate an
incoming call.
Telephone — If Equipped
Press and release the MENU button until “Telephone”
displays in the EVIC.
Incom-
ing Call
When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC provides
the following telephone information:
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that
the UConnect™ phone is currently in analog
mode.
•
•
Phone status: idle, voice mail, roaming, battery strength
and signal strength in increments of 20 percent.
Analog
Call status: Incoming call, connecting, connected, air
time in minutes and seconds, call ended, call failed,
roaming and no phone connection.
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that
the UConnect™ phone is currently roaming.
•
•
UConnect Active.
Roam-
ing
Caller ID phone number display.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that
you have voice mail.
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that
the UConnect™ phone is currently not avail-
able.
Voice
Mail
Phone
Not
Avail-
able
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate a
text message.
4
Navigation — If Equipped
Text
Message
Navigation Display Control
Press and release the MENU button until Navigation
displays in the EVIC. When the Navigation System is On,
the steering wheel buttons can be used to select the Map
or Menu display on the Navigation Unit. When the Menu
display is active, the SCROLL button can be used to scroll
through the list, the FUNCTION SELECT button can be
used to select an item, and the AUDIO MODE button can
be used to return to the previous menu. When the Map
display is active, pressing the FUNCTION SELECT but-
ton will change the Navigation Unit Display to the Menu.
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate the
battery strength of the UConnect™ phone.
Battery
Strength
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that
a phone connection has been made.
Call in
Progress
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Turn By Turn Directions
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press
the FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to
select English, Espanol, Deutsch, Italiano, or Francais.
Then, as you continue, the information will display in the
selected language.
The EVIC displays turn-by-turn directions to a pro-
grammed destination when Turn by Turn Navigation is
enabled through Personal Settings. When enabled, the
EVIC displays the name of the approaching road at the
top of the screen, followed by an arrow to indicate the
direction to turn the vehicle, and a count down to
indicate the distance to the turn.
NOTE: The EVIC will not change the UConnect™
language selection. Please refer to “Language Selection”
in the HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™)
section of this manual for details.
NOTE: Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for
detailed operating instructions.
“Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph (24 Km/h)”
When ON is selected, all doors will lock automatically
when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/ h).
To make your selection, press and release the FUNC-
TION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
Features)
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall
features when the transmission is in PARK.
Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set-
tings displays in the EVIC.
“Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit”
When ON is selected, all doors will unlock when the
vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the P (Park)
or N (Neutral) position and the driver’s door is opened.
To make your selection, press and release the FUNC-
TION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following
choices:
“Language”
When in this display you may select one of five lan-
guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159
“Remote Key Unlock”
“Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock”
When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s
door will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless
entry unlock button. When Driver Door 1st Press is
selected, you must press of the remote keyless entry
unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
When All Doors 1st Press is selected, all of the doors will
unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry
unlock button. To make your selection, press and release
the FUNCTION SELECT button until “Driver Door 1st
Press” or “All Doors 1st Press” appears.
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
remote keyless entry transmitter. This feature may be
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature
selected. To make your selection, press and release the
FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” ap-
pears.
4
“Delay Turning Headlights Off”
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press
and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “0,”
“30,” “60,” or “90” appears.
“Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock”
When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when
the remote keyless entry “Lock” button is pressed. This
feature may be selected with or without the flash lights
on lock/ unlock feature. To make your selection, press
and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON”
or “OFF” appears.
“Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock”
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter. To
make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT button until “OFF,” “30 sec.,” “60 sec.,” or “90
sec.” appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
“Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit”
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, hands–free system (if equipped), DVD
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned off. Opening a vehicle
door will cancel this feature. To make your selection,
press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until
“Off,” “45 sec.,” “5 min.,” “10 min.,” “30 min.,” or “60
min.” appears.
“Display Units of Measure in”
The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if
equipped) can be changed between English and Metric
units of measure. To make your selection, press and
release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “US” or
“METRIC” appears.
“Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock” — If
Equipped
When ON is selected, you can use your Remote Keyless
Entry Transmitter to recall one of two pre-programmed
memory profiles. Each memory profile contains desired
driver seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals (if equipped),
and power tilt and telescopic steering column (if
equipped) position settings, and a set of desired radio
station presets. When OFF is selected, only the memory
switch on the driver’s door panel will recall memory
profiles. To make your selection, press and release the
FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” ap-
pears. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in Section 3 of this
manual for more information.
“Confirmation of Voice Commands” — If
Equipped
When ON is selected, all voice commands from the
UConnect™ system are confirmed. To make your selec-
tion, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button
until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
“Turn by Turn Navigation” — If Equipped
When ON is selected, the Turn-by-Turn directions will
appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a desig-
nated turn within a programmed route. To make your
selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161
“Rain Sensing Intermittent Wipers” — If Equipped
When ON is selected, the system will automatically
activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on
the windshield. To make your selection, press and release
the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF”
appears. When OFF is selected, the system reverts to the
standard intermittent wiper operation.
“Tilt Mirrors Down in Reverse” — If Equipped
When ON is selected, the outside rearview mirrors will
tilt downward when the ignition switch is in the ON
position and the transmission is in the R (Reverse)
position. The mirrors will move back to their previous
position when the transmission is shifted out of R (Re-
verse). To make your selection, press and release the
FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” ap-
pears.
4
“Automatically Move Seat Back on Exit” — If
Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. This feature is turned OFF when the vehicle is
delivered from the factory. To make your selection, press
and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON”
or “OFF” appears.
“Park Assist System” — If Equipped
When ON is selected, the system will scan for objects
behind the vehicle when the transmission is in the R
(Reverse) or N (Neutral) position. To make your selec-
tion, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button
until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the remote keyless entry transmitter is used
to unlock the door. Refer to “Easy Entry/ Exit Seat” under
“Driver Memory Seat” in Section 3 of this manual for
more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
“Headlights On With Wipers” (Available with
Auto Headlights Only)
SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK
To set the analog clock at the top center of the instrument
panel, press and hold the button until the setting is
correct.
When ON is selected, and the headlight switch is in the
AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approxi-
mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The
headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned
off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your
selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
brightness, refer to “Lights” in Section 3 of this manual.
“Automatic High Beams” — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears. Refer to
“SmartBeams” in section 3 of this manual for more
information.
Analog Clock
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163
RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION
and thus remain a part of the AM reception. They
interfere very little with the frequency variations that
carry the FM signal.
Radio Broadcast Signals
Your new radio will provide excellent reception under
most operating conditions. Like any system, however, car
radios have performance limitations, due to mobile op-
eration and natural phenomena, which might lead you to
believe your sound system is malfunctioning. To help
you understand and save you concern about these “ap-
parent” malfunctions, you must understand a point or
two about the transmission and reception of radio sig-
nals.
AM Reception
AM sound is based on wave amplitude, so AM reception
can be disrupted by such things as lightning, power lines
and neon signs.
4
FM Reception
Because FM transmission is based on frequency varia-
tions, interference that consists of amplitude variations
can be filtered out, leaving the reception relatively clear,
which is the major feature of FM radio.
Two Types of Signals
There are two basic types of radio signals... AM or
Amplitude Modulation, in which the transmitted sound
causes the amplitude, or height, of the radio waves to
vary... and FM or Frequency Modulation, in which the
frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound.
NOTE: For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the radio, steering
wheel radio controls (if equipped), and 6 disc CD/ DVD
changer (if equipped) will remain active for 10 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned off. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature.
Electrical Disturbances
Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during
transmission. They mainly affect the wave amplitude,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Ve-
hicle Information Center (EVIC), the radio, steering
wheel radio controls (if equipped), and 6 disc CD/ DVD
changer (if equipped) will remain active for up to 60
minutes after the ignition switch is turned off. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. The time is
programmable through the Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC). Refer to “Delay Power Off to Acces-
sories Until Exit” under “Personal Settings (Customer
Programmable Features)” under “Electronic Vehicle In-
formation Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual for
details.
SALES CODE REF — AM/FM/CD (SINGLE DISC)
RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO AND
HANDS FREE PHONE CAPABILITY
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower
right side of your radio faceplate.
REF Radio
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
SEEK Button (Radio Mode)
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
listenable station in either AM/ FM or Satellite (if
equipped) mode. Press the right side of the button to seek
up and the left side to seek down. The radio will remain
tuned to the new station until you make another selec-
tion. Holding the button will bypass stations without
stopping until you release it.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Press the ON/ VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press
the ON/ VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio.
4
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
the left decreases it.
MUTE Button (Radio Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ЉMUTEЉ will be displayed. Press the MUTE
button a second time and the sound from the speakers
will return. Rotating the volume control, turning the
radio ON/ OFF, or turning ON/ OFF the ignition, will
cancel the MUTE feature.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
For your convenience, the volume can be turned down,
but not up, when the audio system is off and the ignition
is ON.
NOTE: In Hands Free Phone (if equipped) mode, the
MUTE button mutes the microphone.
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station, in either AM, FM or Satellite (if
Mode Button (Radio Mode)
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the
CD player or Satellite Radio (if equipped).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press SCAN a second time.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune/ Audio
control.
5. To exit, press any button/ knob or wait 5 seconds.
PSCAN Button (Radio Mode)
RW/FF (Radio Mode)
Pressing the PSCAN button, causes the tuner to scan
through preset stations, in either AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
preset station before continuing to the next. To stop the
search, press PSCAN a second time.
Pressing the rewind/ fast forward button causes the tuner
to search for the next frequency in the direction of the
arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or Satel-
lite (if equipped) frequencies.
TUNE Control (Radio Mode)
Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or
counter-clockwise to decrease the frequency.
Time Button
Press the time button and the time of day will be
displayed for 5 seconds.
AM/FM Button (Radio Mode)
Press the button to select AM or FM Modes.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune/
Audio control.
Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will be dis-
played. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Bass tones.
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side
Tune/ Audio control to set the minutes. The minutes will
begin to blink.
Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID
will be displayed. Turn the TUNE control to the right or
left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167
Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREB will
be displayed. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Treble tones.
selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button,
the station will continue to play but will not be stored
into push-button memory.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL will
be displayed. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM,12 FM and
12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into push-
button memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can
be selected by pressing the push-button twice.
4
Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will
be displayed. Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to
adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak-
ers.
Press the tune control again or wait 5 seconds to exit
setting tone, balance, and fade.
Every time a preset button is used a corresponding
button number will be displayed.
RND/SET Button (Radio Mode) To SET The
Push-Button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
Preset Buttons 1 - 6 (Radio Mode)
These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
commit to push-button memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation Instructions - CD Mode
SEEK Button (CD Mode)
Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next track
on the CD. Press the left side of the button to return to the
beginning of the current track, or return to the beginning
of the previous track if the CD is within the first 10
seconds of the current selection.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Inserting The Compact Disc (Single CD Player)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display.
MUTE Button (CD Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ЉMUTEЉ will be displayed. Press the MUTE
button a second time and the sound from the speakers
will return. Rotating the volume control or turning OFF
the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers.
If the volume control is ON, the unit will switch to CD
mode and begin to play. The display will show the track
number and play time in minutes and seconds. Play will
begin at the start of track one.
SCAN Button (CD Mode)
NOTE:
Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track.
•
On some vehicles you may insert or eject a disc with
the radio or ignition switch OFF.
To stop the scan function, press the button a second time.
EJECT Button (CD Mode)
•
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
OFF, the CD will automatically be pulled into the CD
Player.
Press this button and the disc will unload and
move to the entrance for easy removal. The
unit will switch to the last selected mode.
•
This radio does not play discs with MP3 tracks.
If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be
reloaded. The radio mode will continue to appear.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169
TIME Button (CD Mode)
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
Press this button to change the display from elapsed CD
playing time to time of day. The time of day will be
displayed for 5 seconds.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player, cassette player or microphone and utilize the
vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source and play
through the vehicle speakers.
RW/FF (CD Mode)
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player
will begin to fast forward until FF is released. The RW
(Reverse) button works in a similar manner.
4
RND/SET Button (Random Play Button) (CD
Mode)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
The auxiliary mode becomes active when an electrical
device is plugged into the AUX jack using a standard 3.5
mm stereo audio cable and the user presses and releases
the MODE button until AUX appears on the display.
NOTE: The radio will return to the last stored mode if
the ignition switch is turned from the OFF/ LOCK posi-
tion to the ACC position, the radio is turned on, and the
radio was previously in the AUX mode.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the
tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward
feature. If the RW button is pressed, the current track will
reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MUTE Button (Auxiliary Mode)
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ЉMUTEЉ will be displayed. Press the MUTE
button a second time and the sound from the speakers
will return. Rotating the volume control or turning OFF
the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers.
No function.
RND/SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Mode Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the
CD player or Satellite Radio (if equipped).
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone — If
Equipped
Refer to the HANDS FREE PHONE (UConnect™) section
of the Owner’s Manual.
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio — If
PSCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Equipped
No function.
Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner’s
Manual.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display from elapsed
playing time to time of day. The time of day will be
displayed for 5 seconds.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171
SALES CODE RAK – AM/FM/CASSETTE/CD
(6-DISC) RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE
RADIO, HANDS FREE PHONE, VIDEO, MP3, and
WMA CAPABILITIES
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Press the ON/ VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press
the ON/ VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio.
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower
right side of your radio faceplate.
4
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Mode Button (Radio Mode)
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the
CD player, Cassette, Satellite, or Vehicle Entertainment
System (VES) (if equipped).
RAK Radio
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SEEK Button (Radio Mode)
Clock Setting Procedure
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
station in either AM/ FM or Satellite (if equipped) mode.
Press the right side of the button to seek up and the left
side to seek down. The radio will remained tuned to the
new station until you make another selection. Holding
the button and will bypass stations without stopping
until you release it.
1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune/
Audio control.
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side
Tune/ Audio control to set the minutes. The minutes will
begin to blink.
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune/ Audio
control.
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next station, in either AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds (satellite
scan 8 seconds) at each listenable station before continu-
ing to the next. To stop the search, press SCAN a second
time.
5. To exit, press any button/ knob or wait 5 seconds.
INFO Button (Radio Mode)
Press the INFO button for an RBDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast (if available) from an FM station (FM
mode only).
Time Button
Press the time button and the time of day will be
displayed for 5 seconds.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173
RW/FF (Radio Mode)
Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Pressing the rewind/ fast forward button causes the tuner
to search for the next frequency in the direction of the
arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or Satel-
lite (if equipped) frequencies.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak-
ers.
TUNE Control (Radio Mode)
Turn the right side rotary control to increase or decrease
the frequency.
4
Press the rotary TUNE control again to exit setting tone,
balance and fade.
AM/FM Button (Radio Mode)
Press the button to select AM or FM Modes.
RND/PTY Button (Radio Mode)
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for
5 seconds. If no action is taken during the 5 second time
out the PTY icon will turn off. Turning the tune knob
within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to
be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broad-
cast PTY information.
Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display.
Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or
decrease the Bass tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREBLE
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Treble tones.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Turn the tune knob to select the following format types:
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Foreign Language
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Personality
Soft_R_&_B
Foreign_Language
Religious_Music
Religious_Talk
Personality
16 Digit-Character Dis-
Program Type
play
No program type or un-
None
defined
News
Information
Sports
News
Information
Sports
Public
Public
College
College
Unassigned
Talk
Talk
Weather
Weather
Rock
Rock
By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY
function only operates when in the FM mode.
Classic Rock
Adult Hits
Soft Rock
Top 40
Classic_Rock
Adult_Hits
Soft_Rock
Top_40
If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program
Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio
will tune to the preset station.
Country
Oldies
Country
Oldies
Soft
Soft
NOTE: If you have selected a PTY with the tune knob,
simply pressing the tune button in will go directly to a
“PTY seek”.
Nostalgia
Jazz
Nostalgia
Jazz
Classical
Rhythm and Blues
Classical
Rhythm_and_Blues
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175
Buttons 1 - 6 (Radio Mode)
Fast Forward (FF)
These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
commit to push-button memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
Press the FF button up momentarily to advance the tape
in the direction that it is playing. The tape will advance
until the button is pressed again or the end of the tape is
reached. At the end of the tape, the tape will play in the
opposite direction.
Operating Instructions — Tape Player
Insert the cassette with the exposed tape side toward the
left and the mechanical action of the player will gently
pull the cassette into the play position.
Rewind (RW)
4
Press the RW button momentarily to reverse the tape
direction. The tape will reverse until the button is pressed
again or until the end of the tape is reached. At the end of
the tape, the tape will play in the opposite direction.
NOTE: When subjected to extremely cold temperatures,
the tape mechanism may require a few minutes to warm
up for proper operation. Sometimes poor playback may
be experienced due to a defective cassette tape. Clean and
demagnetize the tape heads at least twice a year.
Tape Eject
Press this button and the cassette will disen-
gage and eject from the radio.
Seek Button
Press the SEEK button up for the next selection on the
tape and down to return to the beginning of the current
selection.
Scan Button
Press this button to play 10 seconds of each selection.
Press the scan button a second time to cancel the feature.
Press the SEEK button up or down to move the track
number to skip forward or backward 1 to 6 selections.
Press the SEEK button once to move 1 selection, twice to
move 2 selections, etc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Changing Tape Direction
* ”Dolby” noise reduction manufactured under license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Labo-
ratories Licensing Corporation.
If you wish to change the direction of tape travel (side
being played), press Preset 6. The lighted arrow in the
display window will show the new direction.
Metal Tape Selection
If a standard metal tape is inserted into the player, the
player will automatically select the correct equalization.
Operation Instructions - (CD MODE for CD Audio
Play)
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
Pinch Roller Release
position to operate the radio.
If ignition power or the radio ON/ OFF switch are turned
off, the pinch roller will automatically retract to protect
the tape from any damage. When power is restored to the
tape player, the pinch roller will automatically reengage
and the tape will resume play.
NOTE: Note: This Radio is capable of playing compact
discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable
compact discs (CD-RW) compact discs with MP3 tracks
and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks
and WMA.
Noise Reduction
The Dolby Noise Reduction System* is on whenever the
tape player is on, but may be switched off.
To turn off the Dolby Noise reduction System: Press
Preset 1 after you insert the tape. The NR light in the
display will go off when the Dolby System is off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
CAUTION!
SCAN Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for CD Audio Play)
This CD player will accept 4 3/4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
LOAD/EJECT - Load
Press the LOAD/ EJT button and the push-
button with the corresponding number where
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT
DISC. After the radio displays ЉINSERT DISCЉ insert the
CD into the player.
4
You may eject a disc with the radio OFF.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the disc number, the track number, and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1.
Radio display will show ЉLOADING DISCЉ when the disc
is loading, and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
LOAD/EJT - Eject
SEEK Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next
selection on the CD. Press the left side of the button to
return to the beginning of the current selection, or return
to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is
within the first 5 seconds of the current selection.
Press the LOAD/ EJT button and the push-
button with the corresponding number where
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload
and move to the entrance for easy removal.
Radio display will show ЉEJECTING DISCЉ when the disc
is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press and hold the LOAD/ EJT button for 5 seconds and
all CDs will be ejected from the radio.
TUNE Control (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Pressing the TUNE control allows the setting of the Tone,
Fade, and Balance. See Radio Mode.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,
the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout.
If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the
radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display
ЉINSERT DISC” for 2 minutes. After 2 minutes the radio
will go to the previous tuner mode.
AM/FM Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Switches the Radio to the Radio mode.
RND/PTY Button (Random Play Button) (CD
MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: MP3 and WMA Random Play are for file folders
TIME Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
only.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
RW/FF (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the
tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward
feature. If the RW button is pressed, the current track will
reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
•
•
•
Maximum number of directory levels: 15
Maximum number of files: 255
Buttons 1 - 6 (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Selects disc positions 1 - 6 for Play/ Load/ Eject.
Maximum number of folders: 100
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files, however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Maximum number of characters in file/ folder names:
4
•
•
Level 1: 12 (including
3-character extension)
a
separator Љ.Љ and
a
Level 2: 31 (including
3-character extension)
a
separator Љ.Љ and
a
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW.
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as Љkeep disc open after
writingЉ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported MP3 File Formats
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
The radio will recognize only files with the *.mp3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.mp3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 and WMA Files
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 and WMA files may
be affected by the following:
MPEG Specifi-
cation
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit rate (kbps)
•
•
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before
writing to the disc.
The radio display will show ЉLOADING DISCЉ when the
disc is loading.
LOAD/EJT - Eject
Press the LOAD/ EJT button and the push-
button with the corresponding number where
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload
and move to the entrance for easy removal.
Radio display will show ЉEJECTING DISCЉ when the disc
is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
Operation Instructions - (CD Mode for MP3 and
WMA Audio Play)
4
SEEK Button (CD Mode for MP3 and WMA Play)
Pressing the right side of the SEEK button plays the next
file. Pressing the left side of the SEEK button plays the
beginning of the file. Pressing the button within the first
ten seconds plays the previous file.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,
the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout.
If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the
radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display
ЉINSERT DISC” for 2 minutes. After 2 minutes the radio
will go to the previous tuner mode.
LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for MP3 and WMA
Play)
LOAD/EJT - Load
Press the LOAD/ EJT button and the push-
button with the corresponding number where
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT
DISC. After the radio displays ЉINSERT DISCЉ insert the
CD into the player.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press and INFO button while playing MP3 or WMA disc.
The radio scrolls through the following TAG information:
Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if avail-
able).
RND/PTY Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing this button plays files randomly.
SET/DIR Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press the SET/ DIR Button to display folders, when
playing an MP3 discs that have a file/ folder structure.
Turn the TUNE control to display available folders or
move through available folders. Press the TUNE control
to select a folder.
Press the INFO button once more to return to Љelapsed
timeЉ priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button while in the message
display priority mode or elapsed time display priority
mode will display the song title for each file.
Buttons 1 - 6 (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Selects disc positions 1 - 6 for Play/ Load/ Eject.
RW/FF (CD Mode for MP3 and WMA Play)
Press the FF side of the button to move forward through
the file or MP3 and WMA selection.
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Hands-Free Phone” in Section 3 of the Owner’s
Manual.
TUNE Control (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the TUNE Control allows the adjustment of
Tone, Balance, and Fade.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to the “Satellite Radio” section of the Owner’s
Manual.
AM/FM Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Switches back to Radio mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES) (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES)
2. Credit card information.
3. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
Guide.”
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
The Electronic Serial Number/ Sirius Identification Num-
ber is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio
system. To access the ESN/ SID, refer to the following
steps:
SATELLITE RADIO — IF EQUIPPED
Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast-
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius™ Satel-
lite Radio. This service offers over 100 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
4
ESN/SID Access With REF Radios
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and Time buttons
simultaneously for 3 seconds. The first four digits of the
twelve-digit ESN/ SID number will be displayed. Press
the SEEK UP button to display the next four digits.
Continue to press the SEEK UP button until all twelve
ESN/ SID digits have been displayed. The SEEK DOWN
will page down until the first four digits are displayed.
The radio will exit the ESN/ SID mode when any other
button is pushed, the ignition is turned OFF, or 5 minutes
has passed since any button was pushed.
System Activation
NOTE: Your vehicle’s radio must be on and in satellite
mode when the activation process takes place.
To activate your Sirius Satellite Radio service, call the
toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site
at www.sirius.com. Please have the following informa-
tion available when activating your system:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/ Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/ SID).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ESN/SID Access With RAQ and RAK Radios
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and TIME buttons
simultaneously for 3 seconds. All twelve ESN/ SID num-
bers will be displayed. The radio will exit the ESN/ SID
mode when any other button is pushed, the ignition is
turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any button
was pushed.
Selecting Satellite Mode — RAQ and RAK Radio
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word ЉSATЉ
appears in the display.
These radios will also display the current station name
and program type. For more information such as song
title and artist press the MSG or INFO button.
A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the
Satellite radio mode.
ESN/SID Access With REC Navigation Radios
Please refer to your Navigation User’s Manual.
Selecting a Channel
Press and release the SEEK or TUNE knob to search for
the next channel. Press the top of the button to search up
and the bottom of the button to search down. Holding the
TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until
the button is released.
With the ignition in the ACCESSORY position and the
radio off, press the CD Eject and Set buttons simulta-
neously until the 12 digits of the ESN/ SID appear on the
screen.
Selecting Satellite Mode in REF, RAQ, and RAK
Radios
Press and release the SCAN button (if equipped) to
automatically change channels every 7 seconds. The
radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before
moving on to the next channel. The word ЉSCANЉ will
appear in the display between each channel change. Press
the SCAN button a second time to stop the search.
Selecting Satellite Mode — REF Radio
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word ЉSATЉ
appears in the display.
A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
NOTE: Channels that may contain objectionable con-
tent can be blocked. Contact Sirius Customer Care at
888-539-7474 to discuss options for channel blocking or
unblocking. Please have your ESN/ SID information
available.
NOTE: Pressing the ЉSEEKЉ or ЉSCANЉ button while
performing a music type scan will change the channel by
one and stop the search. Pressing a pre-set memory
button during a music type scan, will call up the memory
channel and stop the search.
Storing and Selecting Pre-Set Channels
PTY Button ؆SEEK؆
In addition to the 12 AM and 12 FM pre-set stations, you
may also commit 12 satellite stations to push button
memory. These satellite channel pre-set stations will not
erase any AM or FM pre-set memory stations. Follow the
memory pre-set procedures that apply to your radio.
When the desired program is obtained, press the ЉSEEKЉ
button within five seconds. The channel will change to
the next channel that matches the program type selected.
4
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items should be
placed as far forward as possible. Do not place items
directly on or above the antenna.
Using the PTY (Program Type) Button (if
equipped)
Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your
radio.
PTY Button ؆SCAN؆
When the desired program type is obtained, press the
ЉSCANЉ button within five seconds. The radio will play 7
seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next
channel of the selected program type. Press the ЉSCANЉ
button a second time to stop the search.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons.
VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (SALES CODE
XRV) — IF EQUIPPED
The optional VES™ (Video Entertainment System) con-
sists of a DVD player and LCD (liquid crystal display)
screen, a battery-powered remote control, and two head-
sets. The system is located in the center console storage
bin under the armrest lid. Refer to your VES™ User’s
Manual for detailed operating instructions.
•
•
•
•
The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
Accessing The VES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
4
Raising The DVD Screen
Remote Control Location
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NAVIGATION SYSTEM (SALES CODE REC) — IF
EQUIPPED
Navigation Radio with CD Player and MP3 Capability
(REC) - combines a Global-Positioning System-based
navigation system with a color screen to provide maps,
turn identification, selection menus and instructions for
selecting a variety of destinations and routes. The unit
also provides an AM/ FM stereo radio and six-disc CD
changer with MP3 capability.
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower
right side of your radio faceplate.
Mapping information for navigation is supplied on a
DVD that is loaded into the unit. One map DVD covers
all of North America. Refer to your “Navigation User’s
Manual” for detailed operating instructions.
Clock Setting Procedure
Refer to “Setting the Clock” under ”System Settings” in
your Navigation User’s Manual for details about setting
the clock.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the
surface of the steering wheel at the 3 and 9 o’clock
positions.
The VOLUME button controls the sound level
of the sound system. Press the top of the
VOLUME button to increase the sound level.
Press the bottom of the VOLUME button to
decrease the sound level.
VOL-
UME
Button
Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the
Compass/ Temp/ Audio screen. This screen
displays radio station frequencies, any one of
twelve radio station preset frequencies, CD
disc number, CD track number, tape, or any
one of 200 Satellite radio channels depending
on which radio is in the vehicle.
4
AUDIO
MODE
Button
If Compass/ Temp/ Audio is already displayed when the
AUDIO MODE button is pressed, then the radio mode
will change from AM to FM, to Tape, to CD, or to Satellite
(SAT) accordingly.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center
Vehicles equipped with steering wheel mounted buttons
are also equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC). The EVIC features a driver-interactive
display. This is located in the upper part of the instru-
ment cluster between the speedometer and tachometer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When the EVIC is in the Compass/ Temp/
Audio screen, press the FUNCTION SELECT
button to advance the radio to the next preset
station, to change the side of the tape being
played (if so equipped), or to change the cur-
rent CD track being played (if so equipped).
Tape Player Operation
Press the top of the SCROLL button once to listen to the
next track on the cassette. Press the bottom of the
SCROLL button once to either listen to the beginning of
the current track or to listen to the beginning of the
previous track if it is within 5 seconds after the current
track begins to play.
FUNC-
TION
SELECT
Button
Press either the top or bottom of the SCROLL button
twice to listen to the second track on the tape, three times
to listen to the third track, and so forth.
when the EVIC is in the Compass/ Temp/
Audio screen, press the SCROLL button to seek
up and down the radio stations, CD track
numbers (if so equipped), or satellite radio
channels (if so equipped).
SCROLL
Button
Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to change the side
of the tape being played.
The following describes the operation of the SCROLL
button in each mode:
CD Player Operation
Press the top of the SCROLL button once to listen to the
next track on the CD. Press the bottom of the SCROLL
button once to either listen to the beginning of the current
track or to listen to the beginning of the previous track if
it is within one second after the current track begins to
play.
Radio Operation
Press the top of the SCROLL button once to SEEK the
next listenable station up from the current setting. Press
the bottom of the SCROLL button once to SEEK the next
listenable station down from the current setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191
Press either the top or bottom of the SCROLL button
twice to listen to the second track on the CD, three times
to listen to the third track, and so forth.
4. Before inserting a tape, make sure that the label is
adhering flatly to the cassette.
5. A loose tape should be corrected before use. To rewind
a loose tape, insert the eraser end of a pencil into the tape
drive gear and twist the pencil in the required directions.
Satellite Radio Operation
Press the top of the SCROLL button once to SEEK the
next listenable station up from the current setting. Press
the bottom of the SCROLL button once to SEEK the next
listenable station down from the current setting.
Maintain your cassette tape player. The head and capstan
shaft in the cassette player can pick up dirt or tape
deposits each time a cassette is played. The result of
deposits on the capstan shaft may cause the tape to wrap
around and become lodged in the tape transport. The
other adverse condition is low or “muddy” sound from
one or both channels, as if the treble tone control were
turned all the way down. To prevent this, you should
periodically clean the head with a commercially available
WET cleaning cassette.
4
CASSETTE TAPE AND PLAYER MAINTENANCE
To keep the cassette tapes and player in good condition,
take the following precautions:
1. Do not use cassette tapes longer than C-90; otherwise,
sound quality and tape durability will be greatly dimin-
ished.
2. Keep the cassette tape in its case to protect from
slackness and dust when it is not in use.
As preventive maintenance, clean the head about every
30 hours of use. If you wait until the head becomes very
dirty (noticeably poor sound), it may not be possible to
remove all deposits with a simple WET cleaning cassette.
3. Keep the cassette tape away from direct sunlight, heat
and magnetic fields such as the radio speakers.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep the CD/ DVD discs in good condition, take the
following precautions:
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being On in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper, paper CD labels, or tape to the
disc; avoid scratching the disc.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners,
or antistatic sprays.
Climate Controls — Manual
Air Conditioning
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
The controls for the heating/ air conditioning and venti-
lation system in this vehicle consist of a series of rotary
knobs. These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired
interior conditions.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193
The instrument panel features four dual-vane airflow
registers. Two registers are located on the outer ends of
the instrument panel and two are located in the center of
the instrument panel. These registers can be closed to
partially block airflow.
second time to turn off the air conditioning. The button
includes an LED that illuminates when compressor op-
eration is selected.
Electric Rear Window Defroster
Press this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated side mirrors (if
equipped). An LED in the button will illuminate to
indicate the rear window defroster is ON. The defroster
automatically turns off after about 10 minutes of opera-
tion.
4
CAUTION!
To avoid damaging the electrical conductors of the
rear window defroster, do not use scrapers, sharp
instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window.
Manual Temperature Controls
Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm
water.
Press this button to turn on and off the air condi-
tioning. Cool dehumidified air comes through the
outlets selected by the mode selector. Press the button a
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Blower Control
Mode Selection
The rotary knob on the left controls the
blower and can be set in one of four
speeds and OFF. The blower fan mo-
tor will remain on until the system is
turned to the OFF position or the
ignition is turned OFF.
The mode selector (the right rotary
knob) can be placed in several posi-
tions. Dots between each of the mode
selections identify intermediate modes
that allow the occupants to fine tune
airflow distribution.
Temperature Control
Defrost
The temperature of air can be selected
by rotating the temperature control
knob in the center. The coldest tempera-
ture setting is on the extreme left and
the warmest setting on the extreme
right of the rotation. The knob can be
positioned at any point on the dial.
Air is directed to the windshield through the
outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is also
directed to the front door windows through the side
window demister grilles.
NOTE: To improve fuel economy, leave in defrost only
when necessary.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195
Defrost/Floor
Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets
and the outlets at the base of the windshield. Air
is also directed to the front door windows
through the side window demister grilles.
Recirculation
The recirculation feature can be selected with
the mode control knob. You may choose
between Bi-Level Recirculation and Panel
Recirculation air outlets while in this mode.
Normally, air enters from outside the vehicle. How-
ever, when in Recirculation mode air inside the vehicle
is re-used. Use this mode to rapidly cool the inside of
the vehicle. The Recirculation mode can also be used
to temporarily block out outside odors, smoke, and
dust.
Floor
Air flows through the floor outlets located under
the instrument panel and into the rear seating
area through vents under the front seats.
4
Bi-Level
Air flows both through the outlets located in the
instrument panel and those located on the floor.
Air flows through the registers in the back of the
center console to the rear seat passengers. These
registers can be closed to partially block airflow.
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re-
moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/ Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side win-
dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed.
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but
rainy or humid weather.
Panel
Air flows through the outlets located in the instru-
ment panel. Air flows through the registers in the
back of the center console to the rear seat passengers.
These registers can be closed to block airflow.
NOTE: Recirculate without A/ C should not be used for
long periods as fogging may occur.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Automatic Temperature Control — If Equipped
The Infrared Dual-Zone Climate Control System auto-
matically maintains the interior comfort level desired by
the driver and passenger. This is accomplished by a dual
sun-sensor in the top of the instrument panel, and an
infrared sensor located in the face of the control unit.
There are also various sensors monitored by this system
which take account for vehicle speed, A/ C pressure,
outside temperature, and engine cooling temperature.
The infrared sensor independently measures the surface
temperature of the driver and passenger. Based on the
sensor input, the system automatically adjusts the air
flow temperature, the air flow volume, and amount of
outside air recirculation. This maintains a comfortable
temperature even under changing conditions.
Automatic Temperature Controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197
Operation of the system is quite simple. Begin by turning
the right mode knob to AUTO, and place the blower
control (left knob) to either LO AUTO or HI AUTO. The
LO AUTO position should be used for front seat occu-
pants only. The HI AUTO position should be used when
more air flow is desired, or when rear seat occupants are
present. Dial in the temperature you would like the
system to maintain by rotating the driver’s or passenger’s
control knob. Once the comfort level is selected the
system will maintain that level automatically using the
heating system. Should the desired comfort level require
air conditioning, the system will automatically make the
adjustment.
The air conditioning in this system is automatic.
Pressing this button while in AUTO mode will
cause the LED to flash three times and remain off.
This indicates that the system is in AUTO and requesting
the air conditioning is not necessary.
The system will automatically control recircu-
lation. However, pressing this button will tem-
porarily put the system in recirculation mode
(ten minutes). This can be used when outside
conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity
are present. This will cause the LED to illuminate. After
ten minutes the system will return to normal AUTO
mode function and the LED will turn off.
4
You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply
allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting
the OFF position on the fan control stops the system
completely and closes the outside air intake.
NOTE:
•
The surface of the climate control panel, and the top
center of the instrument panel should be kept free of
debris due to the location of the climate control
sensors. Mud on the windshield may also cause poor
operation of this system.
72°F (22°C) is the recommended setting for maximum
comfort for the average person, however, this may vary.
NOTE: The temperature setting can be adjusted at any
time without affecting automatic control operation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Most of the time, when in Automatic operation, you
can temporarily put the system into recirculation
mode by pressing the Recirc button. However, under
certain conditions in automatic the system is blowing
air out of the defrost vents. When these conditions are
present and the Recirc button is pressed the indicator
will flash and remain off. This tells you that you are
unable to go into recirculation mode at this time. If you
would like to go to Recirculation mode, you must first
move your mode knob to panel, panel/ floor or floor,
then hit the recirc button. This feature will reduce the
possibility of window fogging.
Manual Operation
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic,
Mode Preferred Automatic, or Blower and Mode Pre-
ferred Automatic. This means the customer can override
the blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower
range used when the AUTO setting is not desired. The
left control can be set to any fixed blower speed by
rotating the knob.
NOTE: Please read the Automatic Temperature Control
Operation Chart below for details.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The operator can override the AUTO mode setting and
select the direction of the air by rotating the right mode
knob to one of the following positions.
floor. Air flows through the registers in the back of
the center console to the rear seat passengers. These
registers can be closed to block airflow.
•
Defrost
Air is directed to the windshield through the
outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is
also directed to the front door windows through the
side window demister grilles.
•
Panel
Air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel. Air flows through the regis-
ters in the back of the center console to the rear seat
passengers. These registers can be closed to block
airflow.
•
Defrost/Floor
Air flows through the front and rear floor
outlets and the outlets at the base of the
windshield. Air is also directed to the front
door windows through the side window demister
grilles.
Depress this button to turn on and off the air
conditioning during manual operation only. Con-
ditioned outside air is then directed through the
outlets selected on the mode control dial. The button
includes an LED that illuminates when manual operation
is selected.
•
•
Floor
Air flows through the floor outlets located
under the instrument panel and into the rear
seating area through vents under the front seats.
NOTE: To manually control the air conditioning the
mode selector must be moved out of the AUTO position.
Press this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated side mirrors (if
equipped). An LED in the button will illuminate when
Bi-Level
Air flows both through the outlets located in
the instrument panel and those located on the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
the rear window defroster is ON. The defroster automati-
cally turns off after approximately 10 minutes of opera-
tion for the first push of the button, and will turn off after
approximately 5 minutes for the second push of the
button.
NOTE: Extended use of recirculation may cause the
windows to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to
fog, press the “Recirculate” icon button to return to
outside air. Some temp./ humidity conditions will cause
captured interior air to condense on windows and ham-
per visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow
“Recirculate” to be selected while in the defrost or
defrost/ floor modes. Attempting to use the recirculation
while in these modes will cause the LED in the button to
blink and then turn off.
CAUTION!
4
To avoid damaging the electrical conductors of the
rear window defroster, do not use scrapers, sharp
instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. A 50% solution of ethylene
glycol antifreeze coolant in water is recommended. Refer
to section 7, Maintenance Procedures, of this manual for
proper coolant selection.
Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm
water.
This button can be used to block out smoke,
odors, dust, high humidity, or if rapid cooling
is desired. The recirculation mode should only
be used temporarily. The button includes an
LED that illuminates when the recirculation mode is
active. You may use this feature separately.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Winter Operation
NOTE: Recirculate without A/ C should not be used for
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months
is not recommended because it may cause window
fogging.
long periods as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they
enter the plenum they could plug the water drains. In
winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush and snow.
NOTE: See Operating Tips chart (for Manual A/ C
Control) at the end of this section for suggested control
settings in different weather conditions.
Vacation Storage
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condi-
tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh
air and high blower setting. This will insure adequate
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of com-
pressor damage when the system is started again.
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
your Owner’s Manual for filter replacement instructions.
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re-
moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/ Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side win-
dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed.
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but
rainy or humid weather.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
206 STARTING AND OPERATING
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 207
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
208 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Normal Starting
Normal Starting of either a cold or a warm engine is
obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator
pedal. Turn the key to the “START” position and release
when the engine starts. If the engine has not started
within 3 seconds, slightly depress the accelerator pedal
while continuing to crank. If the engine fails to start
within 15 seconds, turn the key to the “OFF” position,
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the normal starting
procedure.
CAUTION!
Long periods of engine idling, especially at high
engine speeds, can cause excessive exhaust tempera-
tures which can damage your vehicle. Do not leave
your vehicle unattended with the engine running.
Extremely Cold Weather (below Ϫ20°F or Ϫ29°C) To
insure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your dealer) is recommended.
WARNING!
Do not leave animals or children inside parked
vehicles in hot weather; interior heat build up may
cause serious injury or death.
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 209
Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it there while cranking the engine. This should clear
any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.
WARNING!
•
•
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Un-
burned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and
once the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a dis-
charged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery
in another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly. See section 6 of
this manual for the proper jump starting proce-
dures and follow them carefully.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
5
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
have enough power to continue running when the key is
released. If this occurs, continue cranking up to 15
seconds with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to
the floor. Release the accelerator pedal and the key once
the engine is running smoothly. Do not overspeed en-
gine.
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15
second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal
held to the floor, the “NORMAL STARTING” procedure
should be repeated.
If Engine Fails to Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“NORMAL STARTING” procedure, it may be flooded.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
210 STARTING AND OPERATING
After Starting
TRANSMISSION SHIFTING
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
warms up.
4 Speed Automatic Transmission
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms engine coolant and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord
to a standard 110-115 volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that
is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power
Module.
Gear Selector
WARNING!
Shifting from D (Drive) to P (Park) or R (Reverse) (or
from P or R to D) should be done only after the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake when moving the
shift lever between these gears.
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.
Damage to the 110-115 volt electrical cord could
cause electrocution.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 211
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking
brake before placing the gear selector in P (Park), other-
wise the load on the transmission locking mechanism
may make it difficult to move the selector out of park. As
an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P” or
“N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and when your right
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
WARNING!
5
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should always
shift the vehicle into P (Park), remove the key from
the ignition, and apply the parking brake. Once the
key is removed from the ignition, the transmission
shift lever is locked in the P (Park) position, securing
the vehicle against unwanted movement. Further-
more, you should never leave children unattended
inside a vehicle.
Gear Ranges
P (Park)
P (Park) supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never use P (Park) while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in
this range.
When parking on a flat surface, place the gear selector in
the P (Park) position first, and then apply the parking
brake.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
212 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission shift lever into the P
(Park) position:
N (Neutral)
Engine may be started in this range.
WARNING!
•
•
When shifting into P (Park) move the lever all the way
forward until it stops, and is fully seated.
Do not coast in N (Neutral) and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle.
Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument
panel to ensure it is in the P (Park) position.
CAUTION!
Before moving the shift lever out of P (Park), you
must turn the ignition from LOCK to ON so the shift
lever is released. Otherwise, damage to the shifter
could result.
D (Overdrive)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides smoothest up shifts and down
shifts and best fuel economy. Select the “3” range
when frequent transmission shifting occurs when us-
ing the Overdrive range, such as when operating the
vehicle under heavy loading conditions (in hilly ter-
rain, traveling into strong head winds, or while tow-
ing heavy trailers.
R (Reverse)
For moving the vehicle rearward. Always stop before
moving the lever to R (Reverse), except when rocking
the vehicle.
NOTE: If the vehicle is started in cold outside tempera-
tures, shifts into Overdrive may be delayed. Normal
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 213
Overdrive and shifting operation will resume when the
temperature of the transmission reaches the appropriate
temperature. Refer to the “Note” under “Torque Con-
verter Clutch” later in this section.
L (Low)
This range should be used for engine braking when
descending very steep grades. In this range, upshifts
will occur only to prevent engine overspeed while
downshifts occur earlier than other gear range selec-
tions.
If the transmission temperature gets too hot, the
transmission may downshift out of Overdrive or en-
gage overdrive at higher vehicle speeds until the
transmission cools down. After cooldown, Overdrive
will resume normal operation.
CAUTION!
5
•
•
Never race the engine with the brakes on and the
vehicle in gear, and never hold the vehicle on an
incline without applying the brakes. These prac-
tices can cause overheating and damage to the
transmission.
3 (Third)
This range eliminates shifts into Overdrive. The trans-
mission will operate normally in First, Second and
Third while in this range. The “3” position should also
be used when descending steep grades to prevent
brake system distress.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving be-
tween “First” and R (Reverse), do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
NOTE: Using the “3” range while operating the vehicle
under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor-
mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces-
sive shifting and heat build up.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
214 STARTING AND OPERATING
Torque Converter Clutch
converter into the transmission. This is considered a
normal condition and will not cause damage to the
transmission. The torque converter will refill within 5
seconds of shifting from P (Park) into any other gear
position.
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
added to the automatic transmission of this vehicle. A
clutch within the torque converter engages automatically
at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly differ-
ent feeling or response during normal operation in high
gear. When the vehicle speed drops or during accelera-
tion, the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions.
If a condition is detected that could cause damage, the
transmission automatically shifts into second gear. The
transmission remains in second gear despite the forward
gear selected. Park (P), Reverse (R), and Neutral (N) will
continue to operate. This Reset feature allows the vehicle
to be driven to a dealer for service without damaging the
transmission.
NOTE:
•
The torque converter clutch will not engage until the
transmission fluid and engine coolant is warm (usu-
ally after 1–3 miles (1.6–4.8 km) of driving). Because
engine speed is higher when the torque converter
clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmis-
sion is not shifting into “Overdrive” when cold. This is
considered a normal condition. Pulling the shift lever
into the “3” position will show that the transmission is
able to shift into and out of “Overdrive.”
If the problem has been momentary, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears.
•
•
•
Stop the vehicle and shift into PARK (P).
Turn the key to LOCK then start the engine.
Shift into “D” and resume driving.
•
If the vehicle has not been driven for several days, the
first few seconds of operation after shifting the trans-
mission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the
transmission fluid partially draining from the torque
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 215
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit a dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. Your dealer has diagnostic equip-
ment to determine if the problem could recur.
WARNING!
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle you should shift
the transmission into Park, remove the key from the
ignition, and apply the park brake. Once the key is
removed from the ignition the transmission shift
lever is locked in the Park position, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement. Furthermore,
you should never leave children unattended inside a
vehicle. The following indicators should be used to
ensure that you have engaged the transmission shift
lever into the “Park” position:
If the transmission cannot be reset, dealer service is
required.
5 Speed Automatic Transmission
5
•
When shifting into Park move the lever all the
way forward until it stops, and is fully seated.
•
Look at the shift indicator window on the console
to ensure it is in the “P” position.
Gear Selector
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
216 STARTING AND OPERATING
Park Position
ON positions. Remove the rubber storage tray from the
bin located to the right of the shifter lever. The override
can be activated by pressing the pink-colored tab, which
can be accessed through a hole inside the bin. While the
override is pressed, the shifter can be moved out of the
park position without pressing the brake. After operation
return rubber storage tray to its original position.
The PARK position is to be used when parking the
vehicle. Engage only with the vehicle stopped. The PARK
position is not intended to serve as a brake when the
vehicle is parked. Rather, the driver should always use
the parking brake in addition to placing the selector lever
in PARK to secure the vehicle.
PARK supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion.
NOTE:
•
If the key is in the ACC or ON position, you must press
the brake pedal to shift out of the PARK position.
•
The key can be removed from the ignition switch only
with the selector lever in the PARK position. With the
key removed, the selector lever is locked in the PARK
position.
Brake Interlock Override
Reverse
Shift into REVERSE gear only when the vehicle is com-
For electrical system malfunctions there is an override for
the interlock system. In order to override this system the
key must be in the ignition with the switch in the ACC or
pletely stopped.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 217
Neutral
The transmission automatically upshifts through fifth
gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive
axle. When the brakes are released, the vehicle can be
moved freely (pushed or towed). Do not engage in
NEUTRAL position while driving except to coast when
the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g., on icy roads).
When frequent transmission shifting occurs when using
the Overdrive range, such as when operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions (in hilly terrain, travel-
ing into strong head winds, or while towing heavy
trailers, use the AutoStick mode and select the “3” range.
The engine may be started in this range. Use this range
for starting your vehicle if it is moving or being towed.
5
AutoStick Gear selection
The transmission gear can be selected by pressing the
selector lever to the right or the left with the selector lever
in the DRIVE position. The gear currently selected is
indicated in the instrument cluster display. Briefly press
selector lever in the “D -” direction. The transmission will
shift from the current gear to the next lower gear. Shifting
into another gear that allows for quicker acceleration or
to slow the vehicle down is possible. Downshifts can also
be performed.
CAUTION!
Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any other reason
with selector lever in NEUTRAL can result in trans-
mission damage.
Drive
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts and best fuel economy.
Press and hold the selector lever in the “D-” direction.
The transmission will shift from the current gear directly
to the best gear for acceleration.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
218 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: To avoid overrevving the engine when the
selector lever is moved in “D -” direction, the transmis-
sion will not shift to a lower gear if the engine’s revolu-
tions per minute limit would be exceeded.
Delayed Shifts in Cold Temperatures
During cold temperature operation you may notice de-
layed upshifts depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature im-
proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency.
Briefly press the selector lever in the “D +” direction. The
transmission will shift from the current gear to the next
higher gear.
Temporary Transmission Limp Home Mode
The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions.
If a condition is detected that could result in transmission
damage, the transmission will engage Limp Home Mode.
If vehicle acceleration worsens, or the transmission no
longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating in
the Limp Home Mode. In this mode, the transmission
will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is
brought to a stop. After the vehicle has stopped, PARK
(P), REVERSE (R), and NEUTRAL (N) will continue to
operate. SECOND gear will operate in the DRIVE (D)
shifter position. The Malfunction Indicator Light may be
illuminated.
Press and hold the selector lever in the “D +” direction.
The transmission will shift from the current gear directly
to gear “D”.
WARNING!
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order
to obtain braking action. This could result in drive
wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehi-
cle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.
You could lose control of your vehicle and have an
accident.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 219
A reset feature is available to allow the vehicle to be
driven to a dealer for service. To reset the transmission,
use the following procedure:
Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
If the problem has been momentary, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears.
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Move the selector lever to the PARK position.
3. Turn off the engine.
Permanent Transmission Limp Home Mode
Permanent Limp Home Mode will be activated if the
transmission enters temporary Limp Home Mode three
times. Follow the reset procedure described under “Tem-
porary Transmission Limp Home Mode” in this section.
In Permanent Limp Home Mode, PARK (P), REVERSE
(R) and NEUTRAL (N) will continue to operate. SEC-
OND gear will operate in the DRIVE (D) shifter position.
The malfunction indicator light may illuminate.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
5
6. Move the shift lever to the desired range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the transmission will
return to normal operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit a dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. Your dealer has diagnostic equip-
ment to determine if the problem could recur.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
220 STARTING AND OPERATING
Automatic Transmission — General Information
The automatic transmission selects individual gears au-
tomatically, dependent upon:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Altitude
CAUTION!
Vehicle Loading
Driving Style
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•
Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
Selector lever position
Accelerator position
Vehicle speed
•
Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the
engine is at idle speed.
The gear shifting process is continuously adapted, de-
pendent on the driving style, the driving situation and
the road characteristics.
•
•
Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
NOTE:
•
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
After selecting any driving position, wait a moment to
allow the gear to fully engage before accelerating,
especially when the engine is cold.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 221
•
•
If there is a need to restart your engine be sure to cycle
the key to the LOCK position before restarting. Trans-
mission engagement may be delayed up to 10 seconds
after restart if the key is not cycled to the LOCK
position first.
The selector lever is automatically locked while in the
PARK position. To move the selector lever out of the
PARK position, the brake pedal must be firmly depressed
before the shift lock will release.
Shift the selector lever to the desired position only when
the engine is idling normally and the brake pedal is
applied. Do not release the brake until ready to drive. The
vehicle may otherwise accelerate quickly when the selec-
tor lever is in DRIVE or REVERSE position.
The electronically controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating. Therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt or soft until after the
break-in period. This is a normal condition, and pre-
cision shifts will develop within a few shift cycles.
5
Stopping
For brief stops, leave the transmission in gear and hold
the vehicle with the brake pedal. For longer stops with
the engine idling, shift into the NEUTRAL or PARK
position and hold the vehicle with the parking brake.
When stopping the vehicle uphill, do not hold it with the
accelerator; use the brake. This avoids unnecessary trans-
mission heat build-up.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and when your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
Maneuvering
To maneuver in tight areas, control the vehicle speed by
gradually releasing the brakes. Accelerate gently and
never abruptly step on the accelerator.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
222 STARTING AND OPERATING
To rock a vehicle out of soft ground (mud or snow),
alternately shift from forward to reverse, while applying
only slight acceleration. Rocking a vehicle free in this
manner may cause the ABS or traction system malfunc-
tion indicator light to come on. Turn off the engine and
restart the engine to clear the malfunction indication.
AUTOSTICK — If Equipped
Autostick is a driver-interactive transmission that offers
manual gear shifting to provide you with more control.
Autostick allows you to maximize engine braking, elimi-
nate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and improve
overall vehicle performance. This system can also pro-
vide you with more control during passing, city driving,
cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer tow-
ing, and many other situations.
Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a brake transmission shift
interlock system (BTSI) that holds the gearshift lever in
the P (Park) position when the ignition switch is in the
LOCK position. To move the gear selector lever out of the
P (Park) position, the ignition switch must be turned to
the ON position, and the brake pedal must be depressed.
Autostick Operation
By placing the shift lever in the DRIVE position it can be
moved from side to side. This allows the driver to select
a higher or lower range of gears. Moving the lever to the
left (-) triggers a downshift and to the right (+) an upshift.
The gear position will be shown in the transmission gear
display, located in the instrument cluster.
Over Temperature Mode
The transmission electronics constantly monitor the
transmission oil temperature. If the transmission exceeds
normal operating temperature, the transmission will
change the way it shifts to help control the condition.
This may result in a slightly different feeling or response
during normal operation in D (Drive) position. After the
transmission cools down, it will return to normal opera-
tion.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 223
You can shift in or out of the autostick mode at any time
without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal. If you
choose the Overdrive mode, the transmission will oper-
ate automatically; shifting between the five available
gears. When you wish to engage autostick, simply move
the shift lever to the Right or Left (D+/ D-) position while
in DRIVE. The transmission will remain in the current
gear until an upshift or downshift is chosen.
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the gear selector in the
Park position.
PARKING BRAKE
5
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch on, the brake light in the instrument cluster will
turn on.
NOTE: This light only shows that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
Parking Brake
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
224 STARTING AND OPERATING
To release the parking brake, pull out on the parking
brake release located on the left side of the instrument
panel.
The parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
•
Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dan-
gerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be injured. Children should be warned not
to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
gear selector lever. Don’t leave the keys in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving: failure to do so can lead to brake
failure, and an accident.
Parking Brake Release
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking
brake before placing the gear selector in Park, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the selector out of park. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb
on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 225
BRAKE SYSTEM
The electronic brake force distribution (EBD) prevents the
rear wheels from over-braking and provides greater
control of available braking forces applied to the rear
axle.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for
example, repeated brake applications with the engine
off), the brakes will still function. The effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
WARNING!
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems lose normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. There will be some
loss of overall braking effectiveness. This may be evident
by increased pedal travel during application, greater
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential
activation of the Brake Warning Light.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to an accident.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
5
Anti-Lock Brake System
The Anti-Lock Brake System provides increased vehicle
stability and brake performance under most braking
conditions. The system automatically “pumps” the
brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent
wheel lock-up.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
226 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the ABS light remains on or comes on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
WARNING!
•
•
•
Anti-lock system (ABS) cannot prevent the natu-
ral laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase braking or steering efficiency be-
yond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not come on when the
Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
bulb repaired as soon as possible.
The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light
remain on, the Anti-Lock brakes (ABS) and Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD) systems are not function-
ing. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/ h), you
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises. These noises are the system per-
forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system
is working properly. This self check occurs each time the
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/ h).
The ABS light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake Sys-
tem. The light will come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for
as long as four seconds.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 227
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can in-
clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
WARNING!
The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisticated
electronic equipment that may be susceptible to
interference caused by improperly installed or high
output radio transmitting equipment. This interfer-
ence can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking
capability. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
You also may experience the following when the brake
system goes into Anti-lock:
•
The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop),
5
•
•
•
the clicking sound of solenoid valves,
brake pedal pulsations,
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
and a slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the
end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
228 STARTING AND OPERATING
POWER STEERING
WARNING!
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
If for some reason, the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
CAUTION!
Prolong operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
wheel travel are considered normal and does not indicate
that there is a problem with the power steering system.
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power
steering pump may make noise for a short period of
time. This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and
does not in any way damage the steering system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 229
MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM (MDS) - 5.7L
Engine Only
CAUTION!
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire
size may cause failure of the front differential and/or
the transfer case.
NOTE: The MDS system may take some time to return
to full functionality after a battery disconnect.
SELF–SEALING TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
5
A non-hardening viscous sealant applied to the inner
liner of each tire fills punctures up to 0.19 in. (5 mm) to
minimize the loss of air pressure. This contributes to the
safety of the vehicle by significantly reducing the prob-
ability of a roadside stop due to a flat tire.
ALL WHEEL DRIVE — IF EQUIPPED
This feature provides full time All Wheel Drive (AWD)
with Antilock Brake System (ABS)/ Traction Control. The
front wheels provide 38% of the torque, and the rear
wheels provide 62% of the torque. The system is auto-
matic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills
required.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
230 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System consists of the
following components:
Tire Pressure Monitoring — Base System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels (EXCLUDING THE SPARE
TIRE). Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the
valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Re-
ceiver Module.
•
•
•
Receiver Module
4 Wheel Sensors
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
NOTE: For vehicles with optional wheel/ tire sizes and
significantly different tire placard pressures, the placard
pressure value and the low-pressure threshold value is
re-programmable at your authorized dealer to accommo-
date the customer selected wheel/ tire combinations rec-
ommended by DaimlerChrysler.
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to check the
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
the proper pressure.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an au-
dible chime will be activated when one or more
tire pressures is low. The Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell-
tale Light will flash on and off for 10 to 60 seconds when
a system fault is detected. The flash cycle will repeat
every ten minutes or until the fault condition is removed
and reset.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 231
NOTE:
CAUTION!
•
The TPMS can inform the driver of a low tire pressure
condition.
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have
been established for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
After-market wheels can cause sensor damage. Do
not use tire sealant from a can, or balance beads if
your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to
the sensors may result.
•
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, nor to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
•
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
5
Tire Pressure Monitoring — Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module. The wheel sensors
monitor tire pressure, and status for all four active road
tires.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the wheel rim sensor.
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to check the
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
the proper pressure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
232 STARTING AND OPERATING
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an au-
dible chime will be activated when one or more
tire pressures is low. The Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell-
tale Light will flash on and off for 10 to 60 seconds when
a system fault is detected. The flash cycle will repeat
every ten minutes or until the fault condition is removed
and reset.
Modules mounted in three of the four wheel wells,
various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display Mes-
sages in the EVIC, and Telltale Light.
NOTE: For vehicles with optional wheel/ tire sizes and
significantly different tire placard pressures, the placard
pressure value and the low-pressure threshold value is
re-programmable at your authorized dealer to accommo-
date the customer selected wheel/ tire combinations rec-
ommended by DaimlerChrysler.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System consists of the
following components:
The following ЉwarningsЉ will cause a text message to be
displayed, an audible chime to sound and the tire pres-
sure Telltale Light to illuminate. The audible chime will
occur once every ignition cycle for each ЉwarningЉ de-
tected. The tire pressure Telltale Light will illuminate
continuously (solid) and will remain illuminated until
the warning condition is removed/ reset.
•
•
•
•
Receiver Module
4 Wheel Sensors
4 Wheel Sensor Trigger Modules
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display Messages in
the EVIC
When the appropriate conditions exist, the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays the following
messages.
•
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
The system consists of tire pressure monitoring sensors
attached to each wheel through the valve stem mounting
hole, a central receiver module, Wheel Sensor Trigger
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 233
LEFT FRONT, LEFT REAR, RIGHT FRONT,
RIGHT REAR LOW PRESSURE
CAUTION!
One or more of these messages will be displayed in the
EVIC if a low tire pressure condition exists in one or more
tires.
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have
been established for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
After-market wheels can cause sensor damage. Do
not use tire sealant from a can, or balance beads if
your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to
the sensors may result.
Inspect all tires for proper inflation pressure, once the
proper tire pressure has been set, the TPMS warning will
reset automatically when the vehicle has been driven for
at least 2 minutes at or above 15 mph (24 km/ h).
5
CHECK TPM SYSTEM
See your authorized dealer when this message appears in
the EVIC. This message indicates that a system fault
condition has been detected.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the wheel rim sensor.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
234 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
•
The TPMS can inform the driver of a low tire pressure
condition.
•
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, nor to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
•
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
NOTE:
This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired operation.
•
P (Passenger)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Ex-
ample: P215/ 65R15 95H.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 235
•
•
European Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ЉPЉ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/ 65R15 96H
•
•
Temporary Spare tires are high pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: T145/ 80D18 103M.
LT (Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/ 85R16.
High Flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
236 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
؆....blank....؆ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary Spare tire
31 = Overall Diameter in Inches (in)
215 = Section Width in Millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect Ratio in Percent (%)
—Ratio of section height to section width of tire.
10.5 = Section Width in Inches (in)
R = Construction Code
—ЉRЉ means Radial Construction.
—ЉDЉ means Diagonal or Bias Construction.
15 = Rim Diameter in Inches (in)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 237
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
—A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry.
H = Speed Symbol
—A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions.
—The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved un-
der specified operating conditions. (i.e. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions and
posted speed limits).
5
Load Identification:
؆....blank....؆ = Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra Load (or Reinforced) Tire
Light Load = Light Load Tire
C,D,E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry.
Maximum Pressure — Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
238 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side
of the tire.
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire
however the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including
date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
—This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards, and is approved for highway use.
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location. (2 digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size. (2 digits)
ABCD = Code used by tire manufacturer. (1 to 4 digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
—01 means the year 2001.
—Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in
which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 239
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on either the face of the driver’s door or the driver’s side
“B” pillar.
5
Tire and Loading Information
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) the total weight your vehicle can carry
3) the tire size designed for your vehicle
Tire Placard Location
4) the cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear
and spare tires.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
240 STARTING AND OPERATING
Loading
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” sec-
tion of this manual.
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds” on
your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWR’s, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to the
“Vehicle Loading” section of this manual.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lb. (since 5 x 150 = 750,
and 1400 – 750 = 650 lb.)
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/ luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 241
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/ luggage and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and
number and size of occupants. This table is for illustra-
tion purposes only and may not be accurate for the
seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: For the following example the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs. (392
Kg).
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
242 STARTING AND OPERATING
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 243
1. Safety—
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause accidents.
• Under inflation increases tire flexing and can
result in tire failure.
• Over inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause
damage that results in tire failure.
TIRES—GENERAL INFORMATION
5
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
244 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Economy—
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Underinflation also increases tire
rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.
3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on either
the face of the driver’s door or the driver’s side “B” pillar.
Tire Placard Location
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under inflated.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure con-
ditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 245
Example: If garage temperature = 68° F (20° C) and the
outside temperature = 32° F (0° C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (7° C) for this
outside temperature condition.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap–if equipped. This
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1 km) after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres-
sure molded into the tire side wall.
5
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75
mph (120 km/h).
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled at the first opportunity.
Radial-Ply Tires
WARNING!
WARNING!
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use
only. With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary-use spare tires have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four (or 6, in case
of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire,
replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on the
vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/ wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
The limited use spare tires are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
than 60 mph (100 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold
tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire
placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly.
Replace (or repair) the original tire at the first
opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure
to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
5
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limited use
spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare
tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 35 mph (55 km/ h).
See the paragraph on Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section
6 of this manual.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
248 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster
than 35 mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck. And
don’t let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves and will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/ 16 inch (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this
point.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 249
Life of Tire
Replacement Tires
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including but not limited to:
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed (see the paragraph on tread
wear indicators). Refer to the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion placard for the size designation of your tire. The
service description and load identification will be found
on the original equipment tire. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, han-
dling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend that you
contact your original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifi-
cations or capability.
•
•
•
Driving style
Tire pressure
Distance driven
5
WARNING!
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have an accident result-
ing in serious injury or death.
Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease and gasoline.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
250 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
CAUTION!
•
Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
that specified for your vehicle. Some combina-
tions of unapproved tires and wheels may change
suspension dimensions and performance charac-
teristics, resulting in changes to steering, han-
dling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause
unpredictable handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose control
and have an accident resulting in serious injury or
death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load
ratings approved for your vehicle.
Alignment And Balance
Poor suspension alignment may result in:
•
•
Fast tire wear.
Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided
wear.
•
Vehicle pull to right or left.
•
•
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have an accident.
Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right.
Alignment will not correct this condition. See your dealer
for proper diagnosis.
Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.
Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-of-
balance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and
avoid tire cupping and spotty wear.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 251
TIRE CHAINS
CAUTION!
Use only compact chains, or other traction aids that meet
SAE type “Class S” specifications. Chains must be the
proper size for the vehicle, as recommended by the chain
manufacturer.
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted chain clearance between tires
and other suspension components, it is important
that only chains in good condition are used. Broken
chains can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle
immediately if noise occurs that could indicate chain
breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the chain
before further use.
NOTE: Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire.
5
• Install chains on the rear wheels as tightly as pos-
1
sible and then retighten after driving about ⁄2 mile
(0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Use on Rear Wheels only.
• Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement.
•
Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions on
the method of installation, operating speed, and con-
ditions for use. Always use the lower suggested oper-
ating speed of the chain manufacturer if different than
the speed recommended by the manufacture.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: In order to avoid damage to tires, chains, and
your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period of time
on dry pavement. Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s
instructions on method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for usage.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120
km/ h).
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates, and tend to develop irregular wear pat-
terns.
Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both
the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacture suggest
a maximum speed. This notice applies to all chain
traction devices, including link and cable (radial) chains.
SNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during winter. Standard tires are of the all season type
and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S
designation on the tire side wall.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of 4, failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 253
Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your
type of driving found in the “Maintenance Schedules”
Section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permis-
sible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per-
formed.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
2.7L Engines
Your vehicle is designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide satisfactory
fuel economy and performance when us-
ing high quality unleaded gasoline having
an octane of 87.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross”
shown in the following diagram.
3.5L and 5.7L Engines
5
The 3.5L and 5.7L engines are designed to
meet all emissions regulations and provide
satisfactory fuel economy and perfor-
mance when using high-quality unleaded
gasoline with an octane rating of 87 to 89.
The manufacturer recommends the use of
89-octane for optimum performance. The routine use of
premium gasoline is not recommended. The use of
premium gasoline will provide no benefit over high-
quality regular gasoline or mid-grade gasoline and in
some circumstances may result in poorer performance.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
Spark Knock
Reformulated Gasoline
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required.
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of “regular” gasoline be-
fore considering service for the vehicle.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro-
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the world
have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifica-
tions (the World Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) to define
fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions,
engine performance, and durability for your vehicle. The
manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet
the WWFC specifications if they are available.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygen-
ates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 255
content of gasoline may not be indicated on the pump,
you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not
his/ her gasoline contains MMT.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol. Use of
these blends may result in starting and driveability
problems and may damage critical fuel system com-
ponents.
It is even more important to look for gasolines without
MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels
higher than those allowed in the United States.
MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu-
lated gasolines.
Problems that result from using methanol/ gasoline
blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer.
While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it
does not have the negative effects of Methanol.
5
Materials Added to Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives are not needed under
normal conditions and would result in additional cost.
Therefore you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase the octane num-
ber. Gasolines blended with MMT offer no performance
advantage beyond gasolines of the same octane number
without MMT. Gasolines blended with MMT have shown
to reduce spark plug life and reduce emission system
performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recom-
mends using gasolines without MMT. Since the MMT
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fuel System Cautions
•
The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as
octane enhancers are not recommended. Most of these
products contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives are not
the responsibility of the manufacturer.
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
•
The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance,
or damage the emission control system.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
•
An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out-of-tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your dealer for service assistance.
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 257
•
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill.
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is
stopped in an open area with the engine running for
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system
to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the
left side of the vehicle. Push in on the left side (near the
edge) of the fuel filler door to access the fuel filler cap. If
the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement
cap is for use with this vehicle.
•
•
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-
nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
5
Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex-
haust gases from entering the vehicle.
Fuel Filler Door
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
258 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler cap door
reinforcement.
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap), and may result in a
malfunction indicator light on the instrument clus-
ter. A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the
fuel system.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
Gas Cap Tether Hook
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 259
NOTE:
WARNING!
•
Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is properly
tightened. If the gas cap is not secured properly the
Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster
will turn on. Make sure that the gas cap is tightened
each time the vehicle is refueled.
•
•
Remove the fuel tank filler tube cap (gas cap)
slowly to prevent fuel spray from the filler neck
which may cause injury.
The volatility of some gasolines may cause a
buildup of pressure in the fuel tank that may
increase while you drive. This pressure can result
in a spray of gasoline and/or vapors when the cap
is removed from a hot vehicle. Removing the cap
slowly allows the pressure to vent and prevents
fuel spray.
•
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
5
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“Check Gascap” message will display in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — if equipped. Refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
Section 4 of this manual. Tighten the fuel filler cap
properly and press the odometer reset button to turn the
message off. If the problem continues, the message will
appear the next time the vehicle is started. Refer to
“Onboard Diagnostic System” in Section 7 of this manual
for more information.
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
•
•
Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
VEHICLE LOADING
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown in the
charts that follow. This information should be used for
passenger and luggage loading as indicated.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
If the seatbacks are folded for carrying cargo, do not
exceed the specified GVWR and GAWR.
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a certification label attached to the rear
of the driver’s door.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
The label contains the following information:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Name of manufacturer
Month and year of manufacture
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Type of Vehicle
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 261
Overloading
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and front
and rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to insure that it
is not over the GVWR.
A loaded vehicle is shown in the illustration. Note that
neither the GVWR or the GAWR capacities have been
exceeded.
5
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle by axle and side by side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER TOWING
Front
Axle
2054 lbs
(932 kg)
Rear Axle
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully re-
view this information to tow your load as efficiently and
safely as possible.
Empty Weight
1805 lbs
(819 kg )
Load (Including driver, pass-
sengers and cargo)
271 lbs
(123 kg)
579 lbs
(263 kg)
Total
2325 lbs
2384 lbs
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
hicles used for trailer towing.
(1055 kg) (1081 kg)
2546 lbs 2708 lbs
(1155 kg) (1228 kg)
GAWR
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
NOTE: Refer to the Vehicle Certification Label attached
to the rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR
and GAWRs. This table is only an example.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 263
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
Tongue Weight (TW)
The gross trailer weight (GTW) is the weight of the trailer
plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its
Љloaded and ready for operationЉ condition. The recom-
mended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded
trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer
must be supported by the scale.
The downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the
trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10% or
more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider this
as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The maximum height and maximum width of the front of
a trailer.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
5
Trailer Sway Control
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
WARNING!
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kind of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they’re commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized
trailers. See your authorized dealer for a trailer hitch
engineered specifically for your vehicle.
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
Weight-Distributing Hitch
Trailer Hitch Classification
A weight-distributing hitch includes a receiver attached
to the tow vehicle, plus a removable hitch head and
spring bar assembly that fits into the receiver opening
and hook up brackets that connect the spring bars to the
trailer frame. See your authorized dealer for a trailer
hitch engineered specifically for your vehicle.
Class
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer
Wt.)
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
3,500 lbs (1587 kg)
Class II - Medium
Duty
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2268 kg)
10,000 lbs (4540 kg)
Trailer Hitch Classification
Class IV - Extra
Heavy Duty
Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of
trailers weighing over 2,000 lbs (907 kg) with the optional
Trailer Tow Prep Package. See your authorized dealer for
package content and for a trailer hitch engineered spe-
cifically for your vehicle.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle. See your authorized dealer for a trailer
hitch engineered specifically for your vehicle.
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer
weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) chart for the Max. GTW towable for your
given drivetrain.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 265
Engine/Transmission
2.7L Automatic
Frontal Area
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer
Wt.)
Up to 2 persons & Lug-
gage 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
Max. Tongue Wt.
22 SQ. FT. (2.04 square
meters)
100 lbs (45 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
150 lbs (68 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
22 SQ. FT. (2.04 square
meters)
Up to 3 persons & Lug-
gage 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
22 SQ. FT. (2.04 square
meters)
Up to 4 persons & Lug-
gage 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
22 SQ. FT. (2.04 square
meters)
Up to 5 persons & NO
Luggage 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
5
3.5L & 5.7L Automatic
32 SQ. FT. (2.97 square
meters)
Up to 2 persons & Lug-
gage 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
32 SQ. FT. (2.97 square
meters)
Up to 3 persons & Lug-
gage 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
32 SQ. FT. (2.97 square
meters)
Up to 4 persons & Lug-
gage 1,500 lbs (680 kg)
32 SQ. FT. (2.97 square
meters)
Up to 5 persons & NO
Luggage 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to the Tire–
Safety Information Section in this manual.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer and Tongue Weight
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.
•
•
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
•
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options,
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information plac-
ard in the Tire Safety Information Section of this manual
for the maximum combined weight of occupants and
cargo for your vehicle.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
Towing Requirements
WARNING!
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle driv-
etrain components the following guidelines are recom-
mended:
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have an accident.
CAUTION!
•
•
Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles (805
km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage
your vehicle.
5
During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer
towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).
•
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not over-
load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes,
axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chas-
sis structure or tires.
Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this
manual. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR,
or GCWR, ratings.
•
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.
When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in
P for Park. Always, block or ЉchockЉ the trailer wheels.
−
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to the
Tires–General Information section of this manual on
Tire Pressures for proper tire inflation procedures.
•
•
GCWR must not be exceeded.
−
−
Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to the Tires–General
Information section of this manual on Tread Wear
Indicators for the proper inspection procedure.
1. GVWR
2. GTW
−
When replacing tires refer to the Tires–General Infor-
mation section of this manual on Replacement Tires for
proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires
with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase
the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
(This requirement may limit the ability to always
achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a
percentage of total trailer weight).
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Towing Requirements — Tires
−
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
−
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 269
−
−
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hy-
draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys-
tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have an accident.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000
lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000
lbs (907 kg).
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
5
CAUTION!
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights & Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness
and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
7 - Pin Connector
4 - Pin Connector
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
Towing Tips
Towing Tips — Electronic Speed Control (If
Equipped)
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
−
−
Don’t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/ h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
Towing Tips — Automatic Transmission
The “D” range can be selected when towing. However, if
frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the “3” range
should be selected.
−
Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
5
NOTE: Using the “3” range while operating the vehicle
under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor-
mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces-
sive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
Towing Tips — Autostick (If Equipped)
−
For vehicles equipped with Autostick. By using the
Autostick modes, and selecting a specific gear range,
frequent shifting can be avoided. The highest gear
range should be selected that allows for adequate
performance. For example, choose “4” if the desired
speed can be maintained. Choose “3” or “2” if needed
to maintain the desired speed.
The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than
45 minutes of continuous operation. See Schedule “B” in
section 8 of this manual for transmission fluid change
intervals.
NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level
before towing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
−
Extended driving at high RPM should be avoided to
prevent excess heat generation. A reduction in vehicle
speed may be required to avoid extended driving at
high RPM. Return to a higher gear range or vehicle
speed when road conditions and RPM level allows.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER
VEHICLE (Flat towing with all four wheels on the
ground)
Towing Tips — Cooling System
Recreational towing for this vehicle is not recommended.
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
NOTE: If the vehicle requires towing make sure all four
wheels are off the ground.
−
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, put transmission
in neutral and increase engine idle speed.
−
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
−
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
−
refer to Cooling System Operating information in the
Maintenance section of this manual for more informa-
tion.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
274 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
The hazard flasher switch is located in the center of the
instrument panel between the center air outlets.
This is an emergency warning system and should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition switch is OFF.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flash-
ers may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
tion.
Hazard Flasher Switch
•
•
On the highways — Slow down.
To engage the Hazard Warning Flashers, depress the
switch on the instrument panel. When the Hazard Warn-
ing Switch is activated, all directional turn signals will
flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emer-
gency. Push the switch a second time to turn off the
flashers.
In city traffic — While stopped, put transmission in
neutral, but do not increase engine idle speed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 275
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioner
is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/ C
removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature
control to maximum heat, the Mode control to floor, and
the fan control to HI. This allows the heater core to act as
a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, see Section 7, Maintenance, of this
manual. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
CAUTION!
6
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H”, turn the engine off immediately, and call for
service.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
276 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never get any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start or run
the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you need
to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
Preparations For Jacking
•
Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoid ice or
slippery areas, set the parking brake and place the
gear selector in PARK. Turn OFF the ignition.
Hazard Flasher Switch
•
•
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being jacked.
•
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher.
Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite the jacking position. For example, if changing
the right front tire, block the left rear wheel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 277
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
•
Remove the fastener securing the spare tire.
The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access
cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access the jack
and spare tire.
NOTE: The spare tire must be removed in order to
access the jack.
•
•
Open the trunk.
Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
6
Spare Tire Fastener
Opening The Access Panel
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
278 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
•
•
Remove the spare tire.
2. Remove the spare tire, jack and lug wrench.
Remove the fastener securing the jack.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use lug wrench to carefully
pry off wheel cover (if equipped with steel wheels) or
center cap (if equipped with aluminum wheels).
Jack Fastener
Jacking and Changing a Tire
Center Cap Removal
1. Block the wheel diagonally
opposite the flat tire. Passengers
should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 279
5. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack
saddle with the lift area of the sill flange, use the lift area
closest to the flat tire.
WARNING!
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel
covers with care to avoid contact with the metal
edges and retention teeth.
6. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire
and install the spare tire.
4. Before raising the vehicle loosen, but do not remove,
the lug nuts of the flat tire using the lug wrench. Turn the
wheel nuts counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is
still on the ground.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
280 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jack Engagement Locations
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 281
7. Remove the lug nuts, wheel cover (if equipped) and
tire. Remove the cover by hand, do not pry off.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
8. Mount the spare tire. For vehicles equipped with
wheel covers, see the wheel cover installation instruc-
tions. Do not attempt to install a wheel cover on a
compact spare.
9. Tighten all the lug nuts on the mounting studs.
Compact Spare Tire
10. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
The compact spare tire is for temporary emergency use
with radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled at the first opportunity.
6
11. Fully tighten the lug nuts. Torque the wheel lug nuts
to 100 ft/ lb. (135 N. m).
12. Store the flat tire, jack and tools.
•
•
•
Keep tire inflated to 60 PSI (414 KPa) Cold Inflation
Pressure.
WARNING!
Avoid driving more than 50 miles (80 km) before
replacing tire and wheel.
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
This tire is designed as an emergency spare only-do
not exceed 50 MPH (80 km/ h) speed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
282 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Wheel Cover Installation (If Required)
2. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the
valve stem on the wheel.
3. Install the cover by hand, snapping the cover over the
two lug nuts. Do not use a hammer or excessive force to
install the cover.
4. Return to Changing a Tire Section, Item #9 above.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES IF BATTERY IS
LOW
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is on. You can be hurt by the fan.
1. Tighten the two lug nuts on the mounting studs on
each side of the stud which is in alignment with the valve
stem.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 283
NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in
the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the
engine compartment for jump starting.
WARNING!
•
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Un-
burned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and
once the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a dis-
charged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from another vehicle. This type of
start can be dangerous if done improperly, so
follow this procedure carefully.
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not
allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or clothing.
Don’t lean over battery when attaching clamps or
allow the clamps to touch each other. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush contaminated area
immediately with large quantities of water.
NOTE: The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be replaced
with a battery of the same type (vented).
1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry
such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an
inadvertent electrical contact.
2. When boost is provided by a battery in another
vehicle, park that vehicle within booster cable reach and
without letting the vehicles touch. Set the parking brake,
place the automatic transmission in PARK and turn the
ignition switch to the OFF (or LOCK) position for both
vehicles.
6
•
•
3. Turn off the heater, radio and all unnecessary electrical
loads.
A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam-
mable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away
from the vent holes. Do not use a booster battery
or any other booster source with an output that
exceeds 12 volts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
284 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Connect one end of the jumper cable to the remote
jump start positive battery post (A) in the engine com-
partment. Connect the other end of the same cable to the
positive terminal of the booster battery. Refer to the
following illustration for jump starting connections.
5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
of the booster battery and then to the engine ground (B)
of the vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure
you have a good contact on the engine ground. Refer to
the following illustration for jump starting connections.
6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
Jump Starting
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
7. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above
sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the rear wheels to pull errati-
cally to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when
there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear
(driving) wheels.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 285
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
WARNING!
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front to avoid a collision in a sudden stop.
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is danger-
ous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of
the rear wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have an accident. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between Reverse
and Drive. Usually the least accelerator pedal pressure to
maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels is most effective.
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-
tions should be observed:
6
NOTE: Turn off the Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
— if equipped, or Traction Control System (TCS) — if
equipped before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic
Stability Program,” or “Traction Control System” in Sec-
tion 3 of this manual for details.
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
286 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
WARNING!
With Ignition Key
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster
than 35 mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck. And
don’t let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
Your vehicle may be towed under the following condi-
tions: The gear selector must be in NEUTRAL, the
distance to be traveled must not exceed 30 miles (48 km),
and the towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48
km/ h). Exceeding these towing limits may cause a trans-
mission geartrain failure. If the transmission is not op-
erative, or if the vehicle is to be towed more than 30 miles
(48 km), the vehicle must be transported using a flat bed
or the drive shaft disconnected at the rear axle drive
flange.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 35 mph (55 km/h).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 287
Without The Ignition Key
CAUTION!
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK position. The only ap-
proved method of towing with out the ignition key is
with a flat bed truck. Proper towing equipment is neces-
sary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
•
Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front
with sling type towing equipment. Damage to the
front fascia will result.
•
•
•
The only approved method of towing is with a flat
bed truck.
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER
VEHICLE (Flat towing with all four wheels on the
ground)
Flat towing of vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission, is only permitted within the limitations
described in this section.
Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. Damage to
the rear sheet metal, and fascia will occur.
Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans-
mission may result.
6
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER
VEHICLE WITH A TOW DOLLY
The manufacture does not recommend that you tow this
vehicle on a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may occur.
If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed
(wipers, defrosters, etc.), the key must be in the ON
position, not the ACCESSORY position. Make certain the
transmission remains in NEUTRAL.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
290 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 291
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 295
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
CAUTION!
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
Prolonged driving with the “Malfunction Indicator
Light” on could cause further damage to the emis-
sion control system. It could also affect fuel economy
and driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before
any emissions tests can be performed.
If the “Malfunction Indicator Light” is flashing
while the engine is running, severe catalytic con-
verter damage and power loss will soon occur. Im-
mediate service is required.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light.” It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
296 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
or start the engine.
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you
will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal
bulb check.
For states which have an I/ M (Inspection and
Maintenance) requirement, this check verifies the
following: the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Light)
is functioning and is not on when the engine is running,
and that the OBD (On Board Diagnostic) system is ready
for testing.
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn off
the ignition key or start the engine. This means that
your vehicle’s OBD system is not ready and you
should not proceed to the I/ M station.
Normally, the OBD system will be ready. The OBD
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, if you recently had a dead battery, or a battery
replacement. If the OBD system should be determined
not ready for the I/ M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or
start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD
system is ready and you can proceed to the I/ M
station.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD system is ready, you must do
the following:
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 297
If your OBD system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine Mopar parts for normal/ scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to in-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-Mopar parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD system is
ready or not ready, if the MIL symbol is illuminated
during normal vehicle operation, you should have your
vehicle serviced before going to the I/ M station. The I/ M
station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on
with the engine running.
DEALER SERVICE
Your dealer has the qualified service personnel, special
tools and equipment to perform all service operations in
an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your vehicle.
Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure
yourself.
7
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
298 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil
WARNING!
Checking Oil Level — 2.7L, 3.5L Engines
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper equipment.
If you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5
minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before
starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
dipstick. Adding one quart (.9L) of oil when the reading
is at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these
engines.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 299
The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5
minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before
starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding one quart (.9L)
of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the “SAFE”
range will result in an oil level at the top of the “SAFE”
range on these engines.
Engine Oil Dipstick
7
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Checking Oil Level — 5.7L Engines
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
Engine Oil Dipstick
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
300 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
•
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
CAUTION!
More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
•
•
•
Trailer towing.
Taxi, Police or delivery service (commercial service).
Off-Road or desert operation.
CAUTION!
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
ЉMaintenance SchedulesЉ section of this manual.
Operating the engine with the oil levels below the
safe zone, or operating with oil levels that exceed the
top of the safe zone may cause engine damage.
Change Engine Oil
If none of these apply to you, then change your engine oil
at every interval shown on schedule ЉAЉ of the ЉMainte-
nance SchedulesЉ section of this manual.
Road conditions and your kind of driving affects the
interval at which your oil should be changed. Check the
following list to see if any apply to you.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months
whichever comes first.
•
•
•
•
Day or night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C).
Stop and Go driving.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacture only
Extensive engine idling.
Driving in dusty conditions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 301
recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet
the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard
MS-6395. Use Mopar or an equivalent oil meeting the
specification MS-6395.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the Engine Com-
partment illustration in this section.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with 5.7L engines must use
SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper
operation of the Multiple Displacement System (MDS).
Refer to Multi Displacement System under Starting and
Operating for details.
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacture only recommends
API Certified engine oils that
In areas where these grades are not generally available,
higher SAE grades may be used. Lubricants which have
both an SAE grade number and the API Certification
Symbol or ACEA category shown on the container
should be used.
meet
the
requirements
of
DaimlerChrysler Material Stan-
dard MS-6395. Use Mopar or an
equivalent oil meeting the specifi-
7
cation MS-6395.
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.7L and 5.7L
Engines
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart — 3.5L Engines
SAE 10W-30 engine oil is preferred for use in 3.5L
Engines within the operating temperatures shown in the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
302 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
engine oil viscosity chart. SAE 5W-30 Engine Oil is
allowed for use in the 3.5L Engine during cold weather
only to improve cold weather starting.
both an SAE grade number and the API Certification
Symbol or ACEA category shown on the container
should be used.
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided that the
recommended oil quality requirements are met and the
recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter
changes are followed.
Materials Added to Engine Oil
The manufacture strongly recommends against the addi-
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and
it’s performance may be impaired by supplemental ad-
ditives.
10W-30 OIL VISCOSITY CHART
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the Engine Com-
partment illustration in this section.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
In areas where these grades are not generally available,
higher SAE grades may be used. Lubricants which have
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 303
environment. Contact your dealer, service station, or
governmental agency for advice on how and where used
oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
At the mileage indicated in the maintenance schedule, all
belts and tensioner should be checked for condition.
Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
oil change.
Belts should be inspected for evidence of cuts, cracks,
glazing, or frayed cords and replaced if there is indication
of damage which could result in belt failure. Low gen-
erator belt tension can cause battery failure.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacture’s engines have a full-flow type oil filter.
Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of
replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality
filters should be used to assure most efficient service.
Mopar Engine Oil Filters are a high quality oil filter and
are recommended.
Also check belt routing to make sure there is no interfer-
ence between the belts and other engine components.
Spark Plugs
Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine perfor-
mance and emission control. New plugs should be in-
stalled at the specified mileage. The entire set should be
replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark
plug. Malfunctioning spark plugs can damage the cata-
lytic converter. For proper type of replacement spark
plugs, refer to the “Vehicle Emission Control Informa-
tion” label in the engine compartment.
7
Drive Belts — Check Condition and Tensioner
Belt tension is controlled by means of an automatic
tensioner. No belt tension adjustments are required.
However, belt and belt tensioner condition should be
inspected at the specified intervals, and replaced if re-
quired. See your authorized dealer for service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
304 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Fuel Filter
Under normal driving conditions, replace the air filter at
the intervals shown on Schedule “A.” If, however, you
drive the vehicle frequently under dusty or severe con-
ditions, the filter element should be inspected periodi-
cally and replaced if necessary at the intervals shown on
Schedule “B.”
A plugged fuel filter can cause stalling, limit the speed at
which a vehicle can be driven or cause hard starting.
Should an excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the
fuel tank, filter replacement may be necessary. See your
local dealer for service.
Catalytic Converter
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
catalyst as an emission control device.
WARNING!
The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection
in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle with
the air cleaner removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 305
WARNING!
CAUTION!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your ex-
haust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in
areas where your exhaust system can contact any-
thing that can burn.
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
ued operation of your vehicle with
a
severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, the
vehicle should be stopped, the engine shut off and the
vehicle allowed to cool. Thereafter, service, including a
tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be ob-
tained immediately.
7
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
306 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in
the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the
engine compartment for jump starting.
•
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
NOTE: The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be replaced
with a battery of the same type (vented).
•
•
Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idling or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Maintenance-Free Battery
The top of the MAINTENANCE-FREE battery is perma-
nently sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is
periodic maintenance required.
Battery Location
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 307
WARNING!
CAUTION!
•
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Don’t allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water.
•
•
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-
tive (+) and negative (-) and identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
•
•
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Don’t use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 volts. Don’t allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
If a “fast charger” is used while battery is in
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
7
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
308 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
WARNING!
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocar-
bon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Pro-
tection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by dealers or other service facilities
using recovery and recycling equipment.
•
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer
to Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for
further warranty information.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/ C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres-
sor Oil, or Refrigerants.
•
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood,
behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger
side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When
installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation. To
replace the filter remove the access door in the cowl
screen by pressing the retaining clips. Slide the lid on the
filter adapter forward and down and remove used filter.
Install new filter with arrows pointing in the direction of
airflow, which is toward the rear of the vehicle (text and
arrows on the filter indicate this).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 309
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedules” section of this
manual for the recommended air conditioning filter
replacement intervals.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts
for correct fluid type.
Power Steering — Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/ or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified
DaimlerChrysler Dealership.
Front & Rear Suspension Ball Joints
The suspension ball joints should be inspected for exter-
nal leakage or damage when other maintenance is per-
formed.
Steering Linkage
The tie rod end ball joints should be inspected for
external leakage or damage when other maintenance is
performed.
WARNING!
7
Body Lubrication
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturers recommended
power steering fluid.
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, doors, trunk and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the appli-
cation of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be
wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching compo-
nents to insure proper function. When performing other
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
310 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
Windshield Washers/Headlight Washers — If
Equipped
The windshield washer and the headlight washer (if
equipped) share the same fluid reservoir. The reservoir is
located in the front of the engine compartment on the
passenger side of the vehicle. Be sure to check the fluid
level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir
with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze)
and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual water.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the fall and spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar Lock
Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock
cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
The rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield
should be cleaned periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accu-
mulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
Washer Fluid Reservoir
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 311
The fluid reservoir will hold 1 gallon (3.8L) of washer
fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid” appears in
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — if
equipped.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to Exhaust Gas in the Safety Tips section of this
manual.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
312 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh
coolant. Check the front of the A/ C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
WARNING!
•
•
When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant
or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear
steam coming from under the hood, don’t open
the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator is hot.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
ber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
coolant from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing
properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to
drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT RE-
MOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE
COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 313
Cooling System — Drain, Flush and Refill
At the intervals shown on the Maintenance Schedules,
CAUTION!
the system should be drained, flushed and refilled.
Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT en-
gine coolants, may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT cool-
ant is introduced into the cooling system in an
emergency, it should be replaced with the specified
coolant as soon as possible.
If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount
of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling
system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove
all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of old
antifreeze solution.
Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
Selection Of Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended coolant, refer
to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct
coolant type.
7
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based coolants. Use of Propylene
Glycol based coolants is not recommended.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
314 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Adding Coolant
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals. This
coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100,000 miles (160
000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
extended maintenance period, it is important that you
use the same coolant throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) coolant.
NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the
engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant
changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
coolant, and to insure that coolant will return to the
radiator from the coolant recovery bottle.
When adding coolant, a minimum solution of 50% rec-
ommended Mopar Antifreeze/ Coolant 5 Year/ 100,000
Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technol-
ogy), or equivalent, in water should be used. Use higher
concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
Ϫ34°F (Ϫ37°C) are anticipated.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/ engine coolant solution.
The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of
corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 315
ground. If ingested by a child, contact a physician
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
WARNING!
•
•
The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre-
caution. Never add coolant when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure
to build up in the cooling system. To prevent
scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine off and cold, the level of the coolant in the bottle
should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your
service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating
temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only
be checked once a month.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
engine damage may result.
7
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the
proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do
not overfill.
Disposal of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated
substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children
do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open
containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
316 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Points To Remember
•
Maintain coolant concentration at 50% HOAT engine
coolant (minimum) and distilled water for proper
corrosion protection of your engine which contains
aluminum components.
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles
(kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant to
enter the radiator.
•
•
Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean, also.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
•
Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
•
•
Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant recovery bottle. If antifreeze needs to be
added, contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be
protected against freezing.
Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses
Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence
of heat and mechanical damage. Hard or soft spots,
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and exces-
sive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber.
•
If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the
level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when
the engine cools, the cooling system should be pres-
sure tested for leaks.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 317
Pay particular attention to those hoses nearest to high
heat sources such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect hose
routing to be sure hoses do not come in contact with any
heat source or moving component which may cause heat
damage or mechanical wear.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed.
Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou-
plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are
present.
Brake And Power Steering Hoses
When the vehicle is serviced for scheduled maintenance,
inspect surface of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of
heat and mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, abrasion, and excessive swelling
indicate deterioration of the rubber. Particular attention
should be made to examining those hose surfaces nearest
to high heat sources, such as the exhaust manifold.
Components should be replaced immediately if there is
any evidence of wear or damage that could cause failure.
7
Brakes
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Suggested service intervals can be found in the Mainte-
nance Schedules section of this manual.
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed.
Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou-
plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are
present.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
318 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Often, fluid such as oil, power steering fluid,
and brake fluid are used during assembly plant opera-
tions to facilitate the assembly of hoses to couplings.
Therefore, oil wetness at the hose-coupling area is not
necessarily an indication of leakage. Actual dripping of
hot fluid when systems are under pressure (during
vehicle operation), should be noted before a hose is
replaced based on leakage.
WARNING!
Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure.
You could have an accident. If you see any signs of
cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brake
hoses replaced immediately.
Brake Fluid Level Check
NOTE: Inspection of brake hoses should be performed
whenever the brake system is serviced and at every
engine oil change. Inspect hydraulic brake hoses for
surface cracking, scuffing, or worn spots. If there is any
evidence of cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, the hose
should be replaced immediately! Eventual deterioration
of the hose can take place resulting in a possibility of a
burst failure.
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing underhood services, or immediately if
the brake system warning light indicates system failure.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require-
ments described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 319
Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid, refer
to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid
type.
CAUTION!
Do not allow petroleum base fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid, all brake seal components could be
damaged causing partial or complete brake failure.
WARNING!
•
•
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching fire.
Fuel System Hoses
Electronic Fuel Injection high pressure fuel systems are
designed with hoses and quick connect fittings which
have unique material characteristics to provide adequate
sealing and resist attack by deteriorated gasoline.
Use of a brake fluid that has a lower initial boiling
point than the recommended MOPAR DOT 3
product or a brake fluid that is unidentified as to
FMVSS specification may result in sudden brake
failure during hard prolonged braking. You could
have an accident.
You are urged to use only the manufacture specified
hoses with quick connect fittings, or their equivalent in
material and specification, in any fuel system servicing. It
is mandatory to replace any damaged hoses or quick
connect fittings that have been removed during service.
Care should be taken in installing quick connect fittings
to insure they are properly installed and fully connected.
See your authorized dealer for service.
7
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
320 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Transmission
CAUTION!
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating condi-
tions. If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your
authorized dealer immediately. Severe damage to the
transmission may occur. Your authorized dealer has
the proper tools to accurately adjust the fluid level.
Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not
required. For this reason the dipstick is omitted.
If you notice fluid loss or gear shift malfunction, have
your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level.
CAUTION!
Fluid and Filter Changes
Automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed as follows:
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than that
recommended by the manufacturer will result in
more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to the
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts section for
correct fluid type.
Normal Usage — No change necessary
Severe Usage (fluid and filter) — Refer to Maintenance
Schedule “B”
Severe Usage is defined as:
•
Police, taxi, limousine, commercial type operation, or
trailer towing where the vehicle is driven regularly for
more than 45 minutes of continuous operation.
If the transmission is disassembled for any reason, the
fluid and filter should be changed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 321
All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped
The all wheel drive system consists of a Transfer Case,
and Front Differential. The exterior surface of these
components should be inspected for evidence of fluid
leaks. Confirmed leaks should be repaired as soon as
possible.
Severe Usage is defined as:
1. More than 50% of vehicle operation in stop and go
traffic where vehicle is driven regularly for more than 45
minutes of continuous operation, such as in heavy city or
in construction zone traffic.
2. Police, taxi, limousine, commercial type operation, or
trailer towing where the vehicle driven regularly for
more than 45 minutes of continuous operation.
The transfer case fill plug is located on the rear housing
near the output shaft. The level can be verified by the
service plug in the middle of the rear housing, even with
the bottom of the hole. The front differential fill plug is on
the outer cover near the halfshaft attachment. The level
can be verified by removing the plug and inspecting the
level. The level should be even with or slightly below the
bottom of the hole.
Front And Rear Wheel Bearings
Front and rear wheel bearings are permanently sealed.
No regular maintenance is required for these compo-
nents.
7
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
Fluid Changes
The fluid should be changed as follows:
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
Normal Usage
Severe Usage
No Service Required
Front Differential
Transfer Case
No Service Required
Refer to Maintenance
Schedule “B”
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
322 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
Washing
•
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
•
•
•
If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Use Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
scratch the paint.
The most common causes are:
•
•
•
•
•
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Stone and gravel impact.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Atmospheric fallout/ industrial pollutants.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 323
Special Care
polishes. Only Mopar cleaners are recommended. Do
not use oven cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that
use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage
the wheels’ protective finish.
•
•
•
•
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
•
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and
open.
•
•
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
Use Mopar touch up paint or equivalent on scratches
as soon as possible. Your dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective
coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible.
The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibil-
ity of the owner.
7
Interior Care
Use Mopar Fabric Cleaner or equivalent to clean fabric
upholstery and Mopar Carpet Cleaner for carpeting.
•
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To
remove heavy soil, use Mopar Wheel Cleaner or
select a nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use
scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush or metal
Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, or Mopar Satin Select. Do not use harsh cleaners
or Armorall. Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl
upholstery.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
324 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for
Glass Surfaces
leather upholstery.
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with Mopar Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may
scratch the elements.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and Mopar Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather condi-
tioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag or microfiber towel. A mild
soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol
content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean
with a clean damp rag.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 325
Seat Belt Maintenance
•
•
•
After one hour pull the liner from the water and dip it
back into the water about six times. This will loosen
any remaining debris.
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
Rinse the liner thoroughly under warm running water.
Shake the excess water from the liner and dry the
outer surfaces with a clean soft cloth.
If the belts need cleaning use Mopar Total Clean, a mild
soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the
belts from the vehicle to wash them.
Carefully tuck the front, followed by the rear, then side
edges of the cup holder into the center console.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
Cleaning The Center Console Cup Holders —
300C and 300 Touring Models
Cleaning The Center Console Cup Holders — 300
Models
Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent
with the cup holder in the center console.
Perform the following steps to clean the center console
cup holders:
7
NOTE: The cup holder cannot be removed.
•
•
Grab the center of the rubber portion of the cup holder
firmly and lift upward to remove.
Soak the rubber cup holder liner in a mixture of
medium hot tap water and one teaspoon of mild liquid
dish soap. Let soak for approximately one hour.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
326 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Distribution Centers
CAUTION!
Front Power Distribution Center
•
•
When installing the Power Distribution Center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is prop-
erly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the Power Distribu-
tion Center, and possibly result in a electrical
system failure.
A power distribution center is located in the engine
compartment. This center contains fuses and relays.
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage
rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than
indicated may result in a dangerous electrical
system overload. If a properly rated fuse contin-
ues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit
that must be corrected.
Front Power Distribution Center
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 327
Front Power Distribution Center Fuses
Cavity
11
Fuse
Circuits
Cavity
1
Fuse
Circuits
20 Amp
Yellow
Auto Shutdown/ Powertrain
Control Module (PCM)
20 Amp
Yellow
Left High Intensity Discharge
Headlight - if equipped
12
13
14
—
—
—
—
2
20 Amp
Yellow
Right High Intensity Discharge
Headlight - if equipped
25 Amp
Clear
Powertrain Control Module
(PCM)
3
15 Amp
Blue
Adjustable Pedals - if
equipped
15
25 Amp
Clear
Injectors, Ignition Coils
4
20 Amp
Yellow
AC Clutch/ Horn
16
17
—
—
5
20 Amp
Yellow
Headlight Washer - If
Equipped
30 Amp
Pink
Antilock Brakes System (ABS)
Valves/ Powertrain Control
Module (PCM)
6
15 Amp
Blue
Front Control Module (FCM)
7
18
19
20
21
30 Amp
Pink
Windshield Wiper/ Washer
7
20 Amp
Yellow
Fog Lights
50 Amp
Red
Radiator Fan
8
15 Amp
Blue
Lights – License, Park, Side
Marker, Stop, Turn
20 Amp
Blue
Starter
9
15 Amp
Blue
Front Control Module (FCM)
50 Amp
Red
Antilock Brakes System (ABS)
Pump Motor
10
5 Amp
Orange
Powertrain Control Module
(PCM)/ Starter
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
328 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Power Distribution Center
Cavity
22
Fuse
Circuits
There is also a power distribution center located in the
trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center
contains fuses and relays.
40 Amp
Green
AC Clutch/ Radiator Fan High
— Low
23
24
25
26
27
50 Amp
Red
High Intensity Lighting - if
equipped
60 Amp
Yellow
Radiator Fan - AWD
30 Amp
Pink
Front Control Module (FCM)
Transmission - RLE
20 Amp
Blue
30 Amp
Pink
Front Control Module (FCM)
Opening The Access Panel
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 329
CAUTION!
•
•
When installing the Power Distribution Center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is prop-
erly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the Power Distribu-
tion Center, and possibly result in a electrical
system failure.
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage
rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than
indicated may result in a dangerous electrical
system overload. If a properly rated fuse contin-
ues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit
that must be corrected.
Rear Power Distribution Center
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
330 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Power Distribution Center Fuses
Cavity
11
Fuse
Circuits
Cavity
1
Fuse
Circuits
25 Amp
Cluster - without power
C/ BRKR memory seat/ Driver Seat
Switch - with power memory
seat/ Memory Module - if
equipped
60 Amp
Yellow
Ignition Off Draw (IOD)
2
40 Amp
Green
Battery
12
13
25 Amp
C/ BRKR
Passenger Seat Switch
3
4
—
—
40 Amp
Green
Battery
25 Amp
Door Modules - except base/
C/ BRKR Driver Door Lock Switch -
base/ Driver Express Power
Window Switch - if equipped/
Passenger Door Lock Switch -
base
5
6
30 Amp
Pink
Heated Seats - if equipped
20 Amp
Yellow
Fuel Pump
7
8
—
—
14
15
10 Amp
Red
AC Heater Control/ Cluster/
Sentry Key Remote Keyless
Entry
15 Amp
Blue
Ignition Switch/ Occupant
Classification Module (OCM)
9
20 Amp
Yellow
Console Power Outlet
20 Amp
Yellow
Trailer Tow Brake Module - if
equipped
10
—
—
16
17
—
—
20 Amp
Yellow
Cluster
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 331
Cavity
18
Fuse
Circuits
Cavity
30
Fuse
Circuits
20 Amp
Yellow
Selectable Power Outlet
10 Amp
Red
Door Modules/ Power Mirrors
- if equipped/ Steering Control
Module
19
10 Amp
Red
Stop Lights
31
32
33
34
35
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
5 Amp
Orange
Amplifier - if equipped/
Antenna/ Ignition Delay/
Overhead Console - if
equipped/ Passenger Door
Lock & Express Power Win-
dow Switch - if equipped/
Power Mirrors - if equipped/
Rain Sensor - if equipped/
Rear Defrost
7
10 Amp
Red
Airbag/ Occupant Classifica-
tion Module
28
29
10 Amp
Red
Curtain Airbag - if equipped
36
20 Amp
Yellow
Hands Free Phone - if
equipped/ Media System
Monitor DVD - if equipped/
Radio/ Satellite Receiver - if
equipped
5 Amp
Orange
Antilock Brakes Module/
Cluster/ Front Control Module
(FCM)/ Powertrain Control
Module (PCM)/ Sentry Key
Remote Keyless Entry/ Stop
Lights
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
332 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE STORAGE
Cavity
37
Fuse
Circuits
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days you may want to take steps to protect your battery.
You may:
15 Amp
Blue
Transmission - NAG1
38
5 Amp
Orange
Analog Clock/ Cargo Light/
Overhead Console - if
equipped
•
•
Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
39
40
10 Amp
Red
Heated Mirrors - if equipped
5 Amp
Orange
Heated Seats - if equipped/
Inside Rearview Mirror/
Manual Temperature Control
(early build) - if equipped
41
10 Amp
Red
AC Heater Control (except
early build MTC)/ Park Assist
- if equipped/ Tire Pressure
Monitoring - if equipped
42
43
44
30 Amp
Pink
Front Blower Motor
30 Amp
Pink
Amplifier - if equipped/
Antenna/ Rear Defrost
20 Amp
Blue
Amplifier - if equipped/ Front
Control Module (FCM)/
Sunroof - if equipped
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 333
REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS
LIGHT BULBS — Exterior
(300, 300 Touring Models)
Bulb Number
Low Beam Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9006
High Beam Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005
Front Park/ Turn Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3757AK
Front Inner Park Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194NA
Front Outer Park Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194NA
Front Fog Light—
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 9145/H10 (Serviced at Dealer)
Front Sidemarker . . . . . . . . . W5W (Serviced at Dealer)
Tail/ Stop/ Turn Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
Rear Sidemarker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Backup Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
Center High Mount Stop Light (CHMSL) . . . . . . . LED
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
LIGHT BULBS — Interior
Bulb Number
Rear Courtesy/ Reading Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Overhead Console Reading Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Visor Vanity Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A6220
Glove Box Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Door Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Shift Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JKLE14140
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your dealer for re-
placement instructions.
7
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
and should not be used for replacement.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
334 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
BULB REPLACEMENT
LIGHT BULBS —
Exterior (300C Models)
Bulb Number
Low Beam Headlight, High Beam Headlight,
Park/Turn Light, Inner Park Light, and Outer Park
Light – 300 Models
Low Beam Headlight (Standard Halogen). . . . . 9006XS
Low Beam Headlight – High Intensity Discharge
(HID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D1S (Serviced at Dealer)
High Beam Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005
Front Park/ Turn Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157AK
Front Fog Light. . . . . . . . 9145/H10 (Serviced at Dealer)
Front Sidemarker . . . . . . . . . W5W (Serviced at Dealer)
Tail/ Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
Tail Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
Turn Signal Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
Backup Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
Center High Mount Stop Light (CHMSL) . . . . . . . LED
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
•
•
Open the hood.
Twist the appropriate bulb socket assembly counter-
clockwise and pull out. Pull the bulb out of the socket
assembly.
NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
necessary prior to replacing bulbs on the headlight
assembly on the driver side of the vehicle.
•
Replace the bulb and push into socket assembly.
Reinstall the socket assembly, and turn clockwise.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 335
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
336 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Low Beam Headlight, High Beam Headlight, and
Park/Turn Light – 300C
High Intensity Discharge Headlights (HID) — If
Equipped
The headlights are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlight switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlight bulb
yourself. If a headlight bulb fails, take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of
High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlights when the
headlight switch is turned ON. It may cause serious
electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced prop-
erly. See your authorized dealer for service.
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 337
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Dis-
charge Headlights (HID), when the headlights are turned
on there is a blue hue to the lights. This diminishes and
becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds, as
the system charges.
•
•
Open the hood.
Twist the appropriate bulb socket assembly counter-
clockwise and pull out. Pull the bulb out of the socket
assembly.
NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
necessary prior to replacing bulbs on the headlight
assembly on the driver side of the vehicle.
7
•
Replace the bulb and push into socket assembly.
Reinstall the socket assembly, and turn clockwise.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
338 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Backup Light, Side Marker Light, and Tail/Stop
Turn Light — 300 Models
1. Open the Trunk.
2. Remove two fasteners from the back of the tail light
assembly.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 339
3. Pull back the trunk liner.
7. Pull tail light assembly clear from vehicle to access
bulbs. Turn bulb sockets counter-clockwise to remove.
4. Remove the remaining fastener from the back of the
tail light assembly.
5. Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side.
6. Disconnect the electrical connector.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
340 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
8. Pull the appropriate bulb to remove it from the socket.
9. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the
tail light assembly.
10. Close the trunk.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 341
Tail/Stop, Tail, Turn Signal Light, and Backup
3. Pull back the trunk liner.
Light — 300C Models
4. Remove the remaining fastener from the back of the
tail light assembly.
1. Open the Trunk.
2. Remove two fasteners from the back of the tail light
assembly.
5. Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side.
6. Disconnect the electrical connector.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
342 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
7. Pull tail light assembly clear from vehicle to access
bulbs. Turn bulb sockets counter-clockwise to remove.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 343
8. Pull the appropriate bulb to remove it from the socket.
7
9. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the
tail light assembly.
10. Close the trunk.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
344 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
License Light
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES
U.S.
Metric
1. Remove the screws securing the light to the rear fascia.
Fuel (approximate)
2. Remove the bulb and socket assembly and pull the
bulb from the socket.
2.7 Liter Engines (87 Octane)
18 gal-
lons
68 liters
68 liters
72 liters
3.5 Liter Engines (87 to 89 Oc-
tane)
18 gal-
lons
5.7 Liter Engines (87 to 89 Oc-
tane)
19 gal-
lons
Engine Oil-With Filter
2.7 Liter Engines (SAE 5W-20,
API Certified)
6.0 qts. 5.7 liters
6.0 qts. 5.7 liters
7.0 qts. 6.6 liters
3.5 Liter Engines (SAE 10W-30,
API Certified)
5.7 Liter Engines (SAE 5W-20,
API Certified)
3. Replace the bulb and reinstall the bulb and socket
assembly.
4. Reattach the light to the rear fascia.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 345
Cooling System *
2.7 Liter Engines (Mopar
Antifreeze/ Coolant 5 Year/
100,000 Mile Formula) or
equivalent.
9.7 qts
10.6 qts
14.6 qts
9.2 liters
3.5 Liter Engines (Mopar
Antifreeze/ Coolant 5 Year/
100,000 Mile Formula) or
equivalent.
10.0 li-
ters
5.7 Liter Engines (Mopar
Antifreeze/ Coolant 5 Year/
100,000 Mile Formula) or
equivalent.
13.8 li-
ters
7
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to
MAX level.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
346 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Engine Coolant
Mopar Antifreeze/ Coolant 5 Year/ 100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Ad-
ditive Technology)
Engine Oil (2.7 Liter)
Engine Oil (3.5 Liter)
Use API Certified engine oil. SAE 5W-20 is recommended. Refer to the engine oil fill
cap for the correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
Use API Certified engine oil. SAE 10W-30 is recommended. Refer to the engine oil
viscosity chart for the correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard
MS-6395.
Engine Oil (5.7 Liter)
Use API Certified engine oil. SAE 5W-20 is recommended. Refer to the engine oil fill
cap for the correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
Spark Plugs
Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label in the engine compartment.
Oil Filter (2.7 Liter)
Oil Filter (3.5 Liter)
Oil Filter (5.7 Liter)
Fuel Selection (2.7 Liter)
Fuel Selection (3.5 Liter)
Fuel Selection (5.7 Liter)
Mopar 05281090 or equivalent.
Mopar 05281090 or equivalent.
Mopar 05281090 or equivalent.
87 Octane
87 to 89 Octane
87 to 89 Octane
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 347
Chassis
Component
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Automatic Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.
Mopar DOT 3, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended
brake fluids.
Front Axle
API Certified GL-5 SAE 75W90 Gear Lubricant or equivalent.
Power Steering Reservoir
Mopar Power Steering Fluid + 4, Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission
Fluid or equivalent.
Rear Axle
API Certified GL-5 SAE 75W140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent.
Transfer Case
Mopar Transfer Case Lubricant LX, P/ N 05170055EA, or equivalent.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
350 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The “Scheduled” maintenance services, listed in bold
type must be done at the times or mileages specified to
assure the continued proper functioning of the emission
control system. These, and all other maintenance services
included in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
N
T
NOTE:
E
•
For 2.7L engines with Federal Certified Emission Con-
trol Systems, and all 6.1L engines, follow Schedule “A”
from 0 to 102,000 miles, or Schedule “B” from 0 to
105,000 miles.
N
A
N
C
E
•
For 2.7L engines with California Certified Emission
Control Systems, and all 3.5L and 5.7L engines follow
Schedule “A” or “B” from 0 to 120,000 miles.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
Inspection and service also should be done any time a
malfunction is suspected.
There are two maintenance schedules that show the
required service for your vehicle.
E
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the
emission control devices and systems on your vehicle
may be performed by any automotive repair establish-
ment or individual using any automotive part which has
been certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State of
California, California Air Resources Board regulations.
First is Schedule “B.” It is for vehicles that are operated
under the conditions that are listed below and at the
beginning of the schedule.
S
8
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter every
60,000 miles (100 000 km) if the vehicle is usually
operated under one or more of the conditions marked
with an छ.
•
•
Day or night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C).
Stop and go driving.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 351
•
•
•
•
Extensive engine idling.
NOTE: Most vehicles are operated under the conditions
listed for Schedule ЉB.Љ
N
T
Driving in dusty conditions.
E
Second is Schedule “A.” It is for vehicles that are not
operated under any of the conditions listed under Sched-
ule ЉB.Љ
N
A
N
C
E
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16.2 km).
More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
Use the schedule that best describes your driving condi-
tions. Where time and mileage are listed, follow the
interval that occurs first.
•
•
Trailer towing.छ
S
C
H
E
Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial ser-
vice).छ
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months
whichever comes first.
D
U
L
•
Off-road or desert operation.
E
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you, then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first, and follow the maintenance rec-
ommendations in Schedule “B” in this section.
S
CAUTION!
8
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you, then flush and
replace the engine coolant every 102,000 miles (170 000
km) or 60 months, whichever comes first, and follow the
maintenance recommendations in Schedule “B” in this
section.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
352 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
At Each Stop for Fuel
•
•
Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct
operation.
N
T
•
Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully
warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while
the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu-
racy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the
level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
E
Check rubber seals on each side of the radiator for
proper fit.
N
A
N
C
E
At Each Oil Change
•
•
•
•
Change the engine oil filter.
Inspect the exhaust system.
Inspect the brake hoses.
•
Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
S
C
H
E
Once a Month
D
U
L
•
•
•
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
Inspect the CV joints and front and rear suspension
components.
E
S
Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
•
Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.
8
Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir and brake
master cylinder, and add as needed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “B” 353
SCHEDULE “B”
•
Taxi, police or delivery service (commercial ser-
N
T
Follow Schedule “B” if you usually operate your vehicle
under one or more of the following conditions. Change
the automatic transmission fluid and filter every 60,000
miles (100 000 km) if the vehicle is usually operated
under one or more of the conditions marked with an छ.
vices).छ
E
•
•
Off-road or desert operation.
N
A
N
C
E
If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol)
fuel.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Day or night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C).
Stop and go driving.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you, then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first, and follow the maintenance rec-
ommendations in Schedule “B” in this section.
S
C
H
E
Extensive engine idling.
D
U
L
Driving in dusty conditions.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you, then flush and
replace the engine coolant every 102,000 miles (170 000
km) or 60 months, whichever comes first, and follow the
maintenance recommendations in Schedule “B” in this
section.
E
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16.2 km).
S
More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
8
•
Trailer towing.छ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
354 SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at 3 months.
3,000
(5 000)
X
6,000
9,000
12,000
15,000
18,000
(30 000)
X
N
T
(10 000) (15 000) (20 000) (25 000)
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
N
A
N
C
E
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re-
quired.*
X
X
Replace the air cleaner filter.
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and
rotors.
X
S
C
H
E
X
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Rotate the tires.
X
X
D
U
L
X
X
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “B” 355
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at 3 months.
21,000
24,000
27,000
30,000
33,000
36,000
(60 000)
X
N
T
(35 000) (40 000) (45 000) (50 000) (55 000)
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
N
A
N
C
E
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re-
quired.*
X
Replace the air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs. 5.7L Engine.
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and
rotors.
X
X
S
C
H
E
X
X
D
U
L
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV
valve. *
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Rotate the tires.
X
X
E
S
X
X
X
X
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
356 SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at 3 months.
39,000
42,000
45,000
48,000
51,000
54,000
(90 000)
X
N
T
(65 000) (70 000) (75 000) (80 000) (85 000)
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
N
A
N
C
E
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re-
quired.*
X
Replace the air cleaner filter.
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and
rotors.
X
S
C
H
E
X
Change the rear axle fluid.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Rotate the tires.
X
X
X
X
D
U
L
X
X
E
S
Change the Transfer Case Fluid - All Wheel
Drive (AWD) only.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “B” 357
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at 3 months.
57,000
60,000
63,000
66,000
69,000
72,000
N
T
(95 000) (100 000) (105 000) (110 000) (115 000) (120 000)
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
N
A
N
C
E
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re-
quired.*
Replace the air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs. 5.7L Engine.
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and
rotors.
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
X
X
D
U
L
Check and Inspect the accessory drive belt
and tensioner. Replace if required.
E
S
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV
valve. * ‡
Change the automatic transmission fluid and
filter.
X
X
8
Replace the air conditioning filter.
X
X
X
X
Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months
if not done at 102,000 miles.
Rotate the tires.
X
X
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
358 SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at 3 months.
75,000
78,000
81,000
84,000
87,000
90,000
N
T
(125 000) (130 000) (135 000) (140 000) (145 000) (150 000)
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
N
A
N
C
E
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re-
quired.*
Replace the air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs. 5.7L Engine.
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and
rotors.
X
X
S
C
H
E
X
D
U
L
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV
valve. * ‡
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Rotate the tires.
X
X
E
X
X
S
X
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “B” 359
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not re-
placed at 3 months.
93,000
(155 000)
X
96,000
(160 000)
X
99,000
(165 000)
X
102,000
(170 000)
105,000
(175 000)
X
N
T
E
X
N
A
N
C
E
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re-
quired.*
X
X
X
X
Replace the air cleaner filter.
X
X
S
C
H
E
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors.
Replace the engine timing belt. 3.5L Engine.
Replace the spark plugs. 2.7L, 3.5L Engines.
Check and Inspect the accessory drive belt and ten-
sioner. Replace if required.
X
X
D
U
L
X
E
S
Change the rear axle fluid.
X
X
X
Replace the air conditioning filter.
8
Change the Transfer Case Fluid - All Wheel Drive
(AWD) only.
Flush and replace engine coolant at 102,000 miles if
not done at 60 months.
X
X
Rotate the tires.
X
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
360 SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not re-
placed at 3 months.
108,000
(180 000)
X
111,000
(185 000)
X
114,000
(190 000)
X
117,000
(195 000)
X
120,000
(200 000)
X
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re-
quired.*
X
X
X
X
Replace the air cleaner filter.
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors.
Replace the spark plugs. 5.7L Engine.
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV valve. *
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
X
D
U
L
X
X
E
S
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 months,
if not replaced at 102,000 miles.
8
Rotate the tires.
X
X
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacture
to the owner but is not required to maintain the emis-
sions warranty.
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all re-
ceipts.
‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “A” 361
SCHEDULE “A”
N
T
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
6,000
(10 000)
[6]
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
E
(20 000) (30 000) (40 000) (50 000) (60 000)
N
A
N
C
E
[12]
X
[18]
X
[24]
X
[30]
X
[36]
X
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
X
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re-
X
X
X
X
X
quired.*
S
C
H
E
Replace the air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs. 5.7L Engine.
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and
rotors.
X
X
D
U
L
X
X
X
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Rotate the tires.
X
X
X
X
X
X
E
S
X
X
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
362 SCHEDULE “A”
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
42,000
(70 000)
[42]
48,000
(80 000)
[48]
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
N
T
(90 000) (100 000) (110 000) (120 000)
[54]
X
E
[60]
X
[66]
X
[72]
X
N
A
N
C
E
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
X
X
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if
required.*
X
X
X
X
X
Replace the air cleaner filter.
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and
rotors.
X
X
S
C
H
E
X
X
X
Replace the spark plugs. 5.7L Engine.
Check and Inspect the accessory drive belt
and tensioner. Replace if required.
D
U
L
E
S
Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months
if not done at 102,000 miles.
X
X
8
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV
valve. *
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Rotate the tires.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “A” 363
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
78,000
(130 000)
[78]
84,000
(140 000)
[84]
90,000
(150 000)
[90]
96,000
(160 000)
102,000
(170 000)
[102]
X
N
T
E
[96]
X
N
A
N
C
E
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
X
X
X
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re-
quired.*
X
X
X
X
Replace the air cleaner filter.
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors.
X
X
S
C
H
E
Check and Inspect the accessory drive belt and ten-
sioner. Replace if required.
X
D
U
L
Replace the spark plugs. 2.7L, 3.5L Engines.
Replace the spark plugs. 5.7L Engine.
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV valve. *‡
Replace the engine timing belt. 3.5L Engine.
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 102,000
miles if not done at 60 months.
X
X
X
E
S
8
X
X
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Rotate the tires.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
364 SCHEDULE “A”
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
108,000
(180 000)
[108]
X
114,000
(190 000)
[114]
X
120,000
(200 000)
[120]
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if required.*
Replace the air cleaner filter.
X
X
X
X
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors.
Replace the spark plugs. 5.7L Engine.
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV valve. *
Replace the air conditioning filter.
X
S
C
H
E
X
X
X
X
D
U
L
X
X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 months, if not re-
placed at 102,000 miles.
E
S
Rotate the tires.
X
X
8
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner but is not required to maintain the emis-
sions warranty.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced.
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all re-
ceipts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
366 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable
to make these arrangements when you call for an ap-
pointment.
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty, discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in
your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our
products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized
Chrysler, Dodge, or Jeep dealer. We strongly recommend
that you take your vehicle to your selling dealer. They
know you and your vehicle best, and are most concerned
that you get prompt and high quality service. The
manufacturer’s dealers have the facilities, factory-trained
technicians, special tools, and the latest information to
assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely
manner.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident,
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items, and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a
This is why you should always talk to your dealer’s
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 367
•
•
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the dealership. They
want to know if you need assistance.
DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone —(800) 465–2001
If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you
may contact the Manufacturer’s Customer Center.
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
Any communication to the Manufacturer’s Customer
Center should include the following information:
•
•
•
•
•
Owner’s name and address
In Mexico (915) 729–1248 or 729–1240
Outside Mexico (525) 729–1248 or 729–1240
Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
Dealership name
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
Vehicle identification number
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer
Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer
Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
368 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Service Contract
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased your new vehicle. Your dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
your ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
You may have purchased a service contract for your
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex-
pected repairs after your manufacturer’s new vehicle
limited warranty expires. The manufacturer stands be-
hind only the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If you
purchased a manufacturer’s Service Contract, you will
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery
date. If you have any questions about your service
contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract Na-
tional Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of DaimlerChrysler’s warranties applicable to
this vehicle.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s Service
Contract, and you require service after your manufactur-
er’s new vehicle limited warranty expires, please refer to
your contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
MOPARா PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from your dealer. They will help you keep your
vehicle operating at its best.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 369
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In Canada:
In the 50 United States and Washington D.C.: If you
believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause
a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administra-
tion (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, and the
manufacturer.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http:/ / www.NHTSA.gov. or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Dept. of Transportation, Washington DC
20590. You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the Hotline.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals. (No P.O. Boxes).
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
370 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
•
Service Manuals.
•
Owner’s Manuals.
These comprehensive service manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/ troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing and repairing DaimlerChrysler
Corporation vehicles. A complete working knowledge
of the vehicle, system and/ or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams
and charts.
These manuals have been prepared with the assistance
of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with specific Chrysler group vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro-
cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and
safety tips.
Call Toll Free at:
•
•
1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
•
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals.
1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations,
these practical manuals make it easy for students and
technicians to find and fix problems on computer-
controlled vehicle systems and features. They show
exactly how to find and correct problems the first time,
using step-by-step troubleshooting and driveability
procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list
of all tools and equipment.
Or
Visit us on the World Wide Web at:
•
•
www.techauthority.daimlerchrysler.com
www.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 371
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
Traction Grades
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
The following describes the tire grading categories estab-
lished by the National highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
tration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s
manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall
of the tires on your car.
All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in Addition to These Grades.
WARNING!
Treadwear
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled con-
ditions on a specified government test course. For ex-
ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1
1/ 2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
372 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Temperature Grades
WARNING!
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by law.
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
374 INDEX
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 375
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
376 INDEX
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 377
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
378 INDEX
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 379
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
380 INDEX
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 381
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
382 INDEX
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 383
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
384 INDEX
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 385
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
386 INDEX
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 387
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
